Download Hardware & Functionality

Hardware & Functionality

Hardware & Functionality
Contents
1
1.1
1.2
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
4
4.1
4.2
4.3
5
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
6
System documentation
Documentation overview
Online help system
System functions
Transmission wavelengths
Optical Multiplexing Scheme
Amplification scheme
Dispersion compensation scheme
Transponder, Muxponder, and Regenerator Functions
hiT7300 Optical Protection
System management Function
SURPASS hiT7300 NE Types
Optical Line Repeater (OLR) Network Element
Optical Network Node (ONN)
SON – Standalone Optical Node
CWDM support
Passive CWDM Filter Pack Solutions
CWDM Filter Architecture
CWDM Topologies
Hardware design
hiT7300 racks
hiT7300 Sub-racks
RMH07 series Sub-Rack
Mechanical design of modules
SURPASS hiT7300 optical cabling
Exercise
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
3
4
8
9
10
14
48
64
67
89
96
127
130
132
156
161
164
166
168
169
170
172
182
184
188
191
1
Hardware & Functionality
2
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality
1

System documentation
System documentation
Fig. 1 System documentation
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
3
Hardware & Functionality
1.1
Documentation overview
The documentation of the SURPASS 7300 comprises the following descriptions and
manuals:
TIP
The documentation is available on CD-ROM.
Environmental Product Declaration (EPD)
The purpose of this document is to provide environmentally relevant information of a
specific Nokia Siemens Networks product.
This document shall not be interpreted as a specification, modification or amendment
to the specification, or additional or other warranty of any kind. In case of discrepancy
between this document and the Product specification or terms and conditions of the
valid supply agreement between Nokia Siemens Networks and the customer, the
supply agreement and Product specification shall always prevail over this document.
Product Description (PD):
The Product Description (PD) provides an overview of the entire system. PD includes
description of features, components application, performance features, NE types,
operating theory, block diagrams, plug-in card descriptions, and detailed technical
specifications.
Installation and Test Manual (ITMN):
The Installation and Test Manual ITM contains instructions on how to install the
SURPASS hiT7300 system components. This includes mounting the sub-racks in the
equipment racks, connecting and testing power cables, electrical cabling and plug-in
card installation. The ITM also includes the post-installation Commissioning
procedures.
Optical Link Commissioning (OLC):
This document gives the instructions for performing post-installation turn-up and link
optimization procedures and describes the standard optical link commissioning
procedure for SURPASS hiT7300 system.
OLR and ONN Commissioning (ONN / OLR COMM):
This document contains instructions for commissioning of OLR and ONN network
elements and described commissioning process of taking installed OLR or/and ONN
and bringing them to an operational state.
4
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

Documentation on CD-ROM (PDF format)
PD
EPD
TSMN
ITMN
OLC
ONN / OLR SI LSS
SON
Commissioning
Commissioning
OMN
ICMA
CD-ROM Content, PDF, Order Number: A42022-L5972-E010-02-76K5
Fig. 2 User Manuals on CD-ROM
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
5
Hardware & Functionality
SON Commissioning (SON-COMM):
This document contains instructions for commissioning of SON network element and
described commissioning process of taking an installed SON and bringing it to an
operational state.
Open Source Licenses (OSL):
List of used open source software licenses.
Operating Manual (OMN):
The Operating Manual (OMN) provide information on how to operate, monitor and
maintain the SURPASS hiT7300 system via Element Manager (EM) of the Local
Craft Terminal (LCT), principles of alarming and HW upgrade procedures. The
Element Manager (EM) is an easy-to-use Graphical User Interface (GUI) with
extensive Online Help.
Trouble Shooting Manual (TSMN):
The Trouble Shooting Manual TSMN deals solely with alarm handling and trouble
shooting. In the TSMN is obtainable detailed information to troubleshoot and remedy
alarm events. This document describes troubleshooting procedures to be performed
in reaction to alarm events generated in the SURPASS hiT7300 system.
Interconnect, Configuration, and Mechanical Assembly (ICMA):
This document deals with the electrical and optical cabling of the sub-racks and
racks; it illustrates the rack equipment of the several variants and contains block
diagrams and cabling lists, additionally it describes the installation and cabling for the
SURPASS hiT7300 system. ICMA contains complete set of drawings that depict
rack, sub-rack, and plug-in card arrangements, as well as electrical and fiber cabling
plans.
6
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

I
C
M
A
I
T
M
N
L
S
S
SON
Com missio ning
E
P
D
OLR & ONN
Comm issio ning
Customer Documentation overview
O
L
C
O
L
C
O
M
N
P
D
SON
T
S
M
N
Fig. 3 Customer Documentation
EPD
ICMA
ITMN
LSS
NE_COMM
NE_COMM_SON
OLC
OLC_SON
OMN
PD
TSMN
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Environmental Product Declaration
Interconnect, Configuration and Mechanical Assembly
Installation and Test Manual
Long Single Span Architecture User Manual
OLR and ONN Commissioning
SON Commissioning
Optical Link Commissioning
Optical Link Commissioning SON
Operating Manual
Product Description
Troubleshooting Manual
7
Hardware & Functionality
1.2
Online help system
There is possible to use the online help system that is provided with the NE software
to receive information about all the window contents and menus. The Contents, Index
and Find buttons enable the online help to be searched quickly and conveniently.
You may also display essential steps of important operating sequences via the help
table of contents. Individual help topics can be printed, and context-sensitive help
texts called up directly from the user interface.
Fig. 4 Online help system
8
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality
2

System functions
System
functions
!
Fig. 5 System functions
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
9
Hardware & Functionality
2.1
Transmission wavelengths
The SURPASS hiT 7300 supports 40-channel (with 100 GHz frequency spacing) and
80/96-channel (with 50 GHz frequency spacing) DWDM transmission systems within
the C band. The use of a 40-channel or an 80/96-channel plan depends of the
customer’s needs and network application.
The 40-channel frequency/wavelength plan allows a very flexible network design for
various End-of-Life (EOL) optical channel counts from 4 to 40 channels in steps of 4
channel sub-bands. These frequencies/wavelengths are also referred to as standard
frequency grid.
SURPASS hiT 7300 80/96-channel DWDM transmission system is using 80 or 96
channels in the C-Band with 50 GHz of channel spacing. These
frequencies/wavelengths are created by the combination of the 40/48-channel
standard frequency grid with the interleaved set of a 40/48-channel offset frequency
grid.
TIP
The 80/96-channel frequency/wavelength plan is not divided into a 4-channel subband structure (as the 40-channel frequency/wavelength plan).
hiT7300 Transmission Wavelengths
EOL 40 channels
0.8 nm (100 GHz)
„Blue Band“
„Middle Band“ „Red Band“
192,1
192,1 (THz)
(THz)
1560,61
1560,61 (nm)
(nm)
196.00
196.00 (THz)
(THz)
1529,55
1529,55 (nm)
(nm)
Sub-bands
Sub-bands
C01
C02
C03
C04
C05
C06
C07
C08
C09
C10
λ[nm]
40
40 channels
channels in
in C-Band:
C-Band: standard
standard frequency
frequency grid
grid
Fig. 6 Transmission wavelengths for EOL 40 channels
10
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

hiT7300 Transmission Wavelengths
EOL 80 or 96 channels
0.8 nm (100 GHz)
0.4 nm (50 GHz)
EOL
EOL 80
80 channels:
channels:
196.00
196.00 THz
THz
EOL
EOL 80
80 channels:
channels:
192.10
192.10 THz
THz
EOL
EOL 96
96 channels:
channels:
196.10
196.10 THz
THz
EOL
EOL 96
96 channels:
channels:
191.40
191.40 THz
THz
λ[nm]
40
40 or
or 48
48 channels
channels in
in C-Band:
C-Band: standard
standard frequency
frequency grid
grid
0.8 nm (100 GHz)
EOL
EOL 80
80 channels:
channels:
195.95
195.95 THz
THz
EOL
EOL 80
80 channels:
channels:
192.05
192.05 THz
THz
EOL
EOL 96
96 channels:
channels:
196.05
196.05 THz
THz
EOL
EOL 96
96 channels:
channels:
191.35
191.35 THz
THz
λ[nm]
40
40 or
or 48
48 channels
channels in
in C-Band:
C-Band: offset
offset frequency
frequency grid
grid
Fig. 7 Transmission wavelengths for EOL 80 or 96 channels
hiT7300 Transmission Wavelengths
80ch 50GHz
frequency grid.
λ[nm]
Interleaver
Interleaver
0.8 nm (100 GHz)
0.4 nm (50 GHz)
40ch standard frequency
100GHz grid.
40ch offset frequency
100GHz grid.
λ[nm]
Fig. 8
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
11
Hardware & Functionality
The 40 channel frequency/wavelength plan allows for very flexible network design for
various End-of-Life (EOL) optical channel counts from 4 channels up to 40 channels
in steps of 4 channel sub-bands.
The 40 channel SURPASS hiT7300 system uses a maximum of 40 wavelengths
within the C-band, with 100 GHz frequency spacing starting with 1529.55 nm and
ending with 1560.61 nm and divided into following groups:
• 16 “blue” wavelengths (C01 to C04 sub-bands).
• 8 “middle” wavelengths (C05 and C06 sub-bands).
• 16 “red” wavelengths (C07 to C10 sub-bands).
All MUX/DMUX cards have fixed wavelength assignment to their physical channel
ports. Both thin-film filter for realizing flexible subband structures and arrayed waveguide (AWG) optical filter technology for full-access to 40-channel frequency grids
are available, thereby always meeting cost-effective solutions for each network
application. The cards are highly reliable and mostly consisting of passive optical
components only.
TIP
The same MUX/DMUX cards are used for ONN terminal applications as well as for all
OADM and PXC applications.
12
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

Optical
Optical Channel
Channel Groups
Groups
C02
C01
C10 C09 C08 C07 C06 C05 C04 C03 C02 C01
C03
C04
C05
C06
C07
C08
C09
C10
 40 channels overall (192.1 … 196.0 THz)
 No band gap
Fig. 9 Optical Channel Groups
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
13
Hardware & Functionality
2.2
Optical Multiplexing Scheme
The choice and structure of the optical multiplexing technology for hiT7300 takes into
consideration several factors such as the channel granularity requirements,
modularity, and subsequent upgradeability. The optical Mux/Demux cards offer very
low insertion loss to facilitate links with a large number of ONN’s as well as to support
ONN’s without booster amplifier wherever possible in order to reduce the overall
system cost.
SURPASS hiT 7300 supports 40 wavelengths out of the 100 GHz wavelength grid
and 80/96 wavelengths out of the 50 GHz wavelength grid according to ITU-T
G.692/G.694.1.
The Mux/Demux cards have fixed wavelength to physical port assignment. The cards
are highly reliable consisting of the passive optical components including only the
electrical components necessary for the card identification. All Mux/Demux cards
used for Flexible Terminal/OADM are bidirectional cards, where Mux/Demux cards
for FullAccess Terminal/OADM are 40-channel unidirectional or 48-channel
bidirectional cards.
TIP
The same Mux/Demux cards are used for the ONN terminal application as well as for
the ONN OADM application.
TIP
Cards are bidirectional, only DEMUX direction is shown.
14
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

Sub-band filter and AWG filter options
for 40 channel terminals
Band Filter
4 Channel Filter
...
...
Terminal based on 4- channel sub-bands
• Flexible pay as you grow approach
with modular architecture, 4
channel steps
• In service upgrade up to 40
channels end of life
AWG – 40 channel
Arrayed Waveguide
Grating
Terminal based on AWG
• Full access to 40 channels from day 1
• 40-ch AWG and 4-ch group filters can
be mixed in the network
• Upgrade to 80 channels with add.
interleaver and off-set grid AWG
Both fixed filter options – banded and AWG –
are fully interoperable
Fig. 10 Optical Multiplexing Scheme- Flexible / AWG
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
15
Hardware & Functionality
2.2.1
Flexible Filter structure (cascaded filters)
The filter cards act as multiplexers/demultiplexers by providing the primary wave
division or aggregation of all the transponder signals and allowing access (add/drop)
to a particular wavelengths or set of wavelengths.
For realizing flexible sub-band structures for multiplexing/demultiplexing of up to 40
channels in standard frequency grid (C-band) with 4-channel granularity there are
only 4 types of MUX/DMUX cards needed, which are already supported since R4.0 of
hiT 7300:
Optical Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Cards for flexible sub-band structures
Card function
Card name
Red/blue splitter + 2x sub-band multiplexing
(bidirectional)
F08SB
4x sub-band multiplexing (bidirectional)
F16SB (red and blue band variant)
1x sub-band filter + 4-channel multiplexing
(bidirectional)
F04MDU (10 sub-band variants)
4-Channel multiplexing (bidirectional)
F04MDN (10 sub-band variants)
Fig. 11 Optical Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Cards
16
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality
2.2.1.1

F04MDN-1 Filter Cards
The F04MDN-1 card consists of one four channel fixed filter. The card is bidirectional
and occupies a single slot. F04MDN-1 is offered in ten different variants (subbands
C1-C10) to cover the entire 40 channel wavelength plan.
Fig. 12 F04MDN-1 Filter Cards and F04MDU-1 Filter Cards
2.2.1.2
F04MDU-1 Filter Cards
The F04MDU-1 card consists of one band filter and one corresponding four channel
fixed filter. The card is bidirectional and occupies a single slot. It is offered in ten
different variants (subbands C1-C10) to cover the entire 40 channel wavelength plan.
Fig. 13 HW Layout
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
17
Hardware & Functionality
2.2.1.3
F08SB-1 Filter Card
The F08SB-1 card consists of a red/blue filter and two band filters. The card is
bidirectional and occupies a single slot. It offers two band filters for subbands C5 and
C6 and a red/blue filter that separates subbands C1-C4 from subbands C7-C10.
There is only one variant of this card.
Fig. 14 F08SB-1 Filter Card
2.2.1.4
F16SB-1 Filter Cards
Each F16SB-1 card consists of four cascaded band filters. The card is bidirectional
and occupies a single slot. It is offered in two variants for subbands C1-C4 (blue
band) and subbands C7-C10 (red band), respectively.
Fig. 15 F16SB-1 Filter Cards
18
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

Fig. 16 HW layout
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
19
Hardware & Functionality
2.2.2
Fixed Filter structure (AWG filter)
For realizing 40-channel (EOL) systems in standard and offset frequency grid (Cband) with full access to all channels from day 1 (BOL), and for 80 or 96-channel
systems the following MUX/DMUX cards are supported in hiT 7300:
Optical Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Cards for 40/80-channels full access scheme
Card function
Card name
40-channel unidirectional multiplexing/demultiplexing for
100GHz Standard frequency grid or Offset frequency grid
F40/S or /O
40-channel unidirectional multiplexing/demultiplexing and per
channel VOA's for 100GHz Standard frequency grid or Offset
frequency grid
F40V/S or /O
40-channel multiplexing for 100GHz frequency grid, per channel F40MP/S or /O
monitor diodes, /S and /O
40-channel multiplexing for 100GHz frequency grid, per channel F40VMP/S or /O
monitor diodes and VOAs, /S and /O
80-channel split coupler and drop interleaver (unidirectional)
F80DCI
80-channel interleaver (bidirectional)
F80MDI
Optical Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Cards for 96-channels full access scheme
Card function
20
Card name
48-channel unidirectional multiplexing and demultiplexing for
100GHz Standard frequency grid
F48MDP/S
48-channel unidirectional multiplexing and demultiplexing for
100GHz Offset frequency grid
F48MDP/O
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

Fig. 17 Optical Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Cards of EOL 40/80 channels
Fig. 18 Optical Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Cards of EOL 96 channels
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
21
Hardware & Functionality
2.2.2.1
F40-1/S and F40-/O Filter Cards
Each F40-1/x filter cards consist of a 40-channel fixed filter based on temperaturecontrolled arrayed waveguide grating (AWG) technology, which performs multiplexing
or demultiplexing of 40 channels in 100 GHz spaced standard frequency grid (F40/S)
or 100 GHz spaced offset (50 GHz shifted) frequency grid (F40/O), respectively.
The F40-1/x card is unidirectional and performs either an optical multiplexing or
demultiplexing.
Multiplexer Card
F40-1/S
F40-1/S
.
λ1 λ2
... λ 40
Multiplexer Card
F40-1/O
λ41 λ42
Demultiplexer Card
.
λ1 λ2
... λ 40
Demultiplexer Card
F40-1/O
... λ 80
λ41 λ42
... λ 80
Fig. 19 F40-1/x Filter Cards
Fig. 20 HW Layout
22
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality
2.2.2.2

F40V/S and F40V/O Filter Cards
The F40V-1/x card consists of a 40-channel fixed filter based on temperaturecontrolled AWG technology. The F40V-1/x performs multiplexing or demultiplexing of
40 channels in 100 GHz spaced standard frequency grid (F40V-1/S) or 100 GHz
spaced offset (50 GHz shifted) frequency grid (F40V-1/O), respectively.
In addition to multiplexing/demultiplexing each F40V-1/x contains a Variable Optical
Attenuator (VOA) for each individual input/output channel. The VOAs are used in the
optical channel power pre-emphasis (in case the F40V-1/x card is used as
multiplexer) or drop channel power adjust (in case the F40V-1/x card is used as
demultiplexer), therefore allowing a very compact and cost-effective solution with
high channel count while, achieving highly automated network commissioning at the
same time.
The F40-1V/x card is unidirectional and performs either an optical multiplexing or
demultiplexing like the F40/x each F40V/x card provides 41 optical front connectors
within 21 duplex LC/PC connectors on the front panel for access to all 40 channel
ports and the aggregation port, it occupies 2 slots (2x 30mm).
Multiplexer Card
F40V-1/S
λ40 ... λ 2 λ 1
Multiplexer Card
F40V-1/O
λ80 ... λ 42 λ 41
Demultiplexer Card
F40V-1/S
λ40 ...
λ 2 λ1
Demultiplexer Card
F40V-1/O
λ 80 ... λ 42 λ 41
Fig. 21 F40V/S and F40V/O Filter Cards
TIP
When used as a demultiplexer, an optical input power monitor is provided for
detection of loss-of-signal and laser safety control.
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
23
Hardware & Functionality
2.2.2.3
F48MDP-1/S and F48MDP-1/O Filter Cards
The F48MDP-1/x card consists of a 48-channel fixed filter based on AWG
technology. The F48MDP-1/x is a bidirectional card that performs multiplexing or
demultiplexing of 48 channels in spaced standard frequency grid (F48MDP-1/S) or
spaced offset (50 GHz shifted) frequency grid (F48MDP-1/O).
The input port of the demultiplexing incorporates a monitor diode for LOS detection
and signaling to Laser Safety bus and to Fault-Management. The demultiplexer has a
monitor point for service and optional MCP access.
The multiplexing part of the card has in each input port, monitors for Automatic Port
Connection Detection (APDC), power level measurement and LOS detection.
Fig. 22 F48MPD-1/x Filter Cards
24
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

Fig. 23 HW Layout
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
25
Hardware & Functionality
2.2.3
Wavelength-Selective Switch Cards
The filter cards act as multiplexers/demultiplexers by providing the primary wave
division or aggregation of all the transponder signals and allowing access (add/drop)
to a particular set of wavelengths from an optical fiber while passing the remaining
wavelengths. Line side wavelengths require translation to client side equipment via
the transponder card.
The following Wavelength-Selective Switch cards are supported in hiT 7300:
Wavelength-Selective Switch Cards
26
Card name
Usage
Optical multiplexer of
Architecture
Communication
type
F40MR-1
a ROADM
PLC-WSS
Bidirectional
F02MR-1
an ONN-R2
MEMS-WSS
Bidirectional
F08MR-1
reconfigurable PXC
MEMS-WSS
Bidirectional
F06DR80-1
Optical demultiplexer
of a reconfigurable
PXC
MEMS-WSS
Unidirectional
F06MR80-1
a reconfigurable PXC
MEMS-WSS
Unidirectional
F09DR80-1
Optical demultiplexer
of a reconfigurable
PXC
PLC-WSS
Unidirectional
F09MR80-1
a reconfigurable PXC
PLC-WSS
Unidirectional
F09MDRT-1/S
an ONN-RT or ONNX
Tunable WSS
Bidirectional
F09MDRT-1/O
an ONN-RT or ONNX
Tunable WSS
Bidirectional
F09MDR96-1
an ONN-X96
Tunable WSS
Bidirectional
O09CC-1
an ONN-X96
Coupler card for
color- and
directionless PXC
Bidirectional
F80DCI-1
Optical demultiplexer
of a ROADM
Interleaver filter
and splitter
Unidirectional
F80MDI-1
Optical multiplexer or
demultiplexer
Interleaver filters
Bidirectional
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

Wavelength-Selective Switch Cards
Card name
Usage
Optical multiplexer of …
Architecture
Communication
type
F40MR-1
a ROADM
PLC-WSS
Bidirectional
F02MR-1
an ONN-R2
MEMS-WSS
Bidirectional
F08MR-1
reconfigurable PXC
MEMS-WSS
Bidirectional
F06DR80-1
Optical demultiplexer of a
reconfigurable PXC
MEMS-WSS
Unidirectional
F06MR80-1
a reconfigurable PXC
MEMS-WSS
Unidirectional
F09DR80-1
Optical demultiplexer of a
reconfigurable PXC
PLC-WSS
Unidirectional
F09MR80-1
a reconfigurable PXC
PLC-WSS
Unidirectional
F09MDRT-1/S
an ONN-RT or ONN-X
Tunable WSS
Bidirectional
F09MDRT-1/O
an ONN-RT or ONN-X
Tunable WSS
Bidirectional
F09MDR96-1
an ONN-X96
Tunable WSS
Bidirectional
O09CC-1
an ONN-X96
Couple card for colorless
and directionless PXC
Bidirectional
F80DCI-1
Optical demultiplexer of a ROADM
Interleaver filter and splitter
Unidirectional
F80MDI-1
Optical multiplexer or demultiplexer
Interleaver filters
bidirectional
Fig. 24 Wavelength-Selective Switch Cards
Wavelength-Selective Switch Cards
Card name
F40MR-1
F02MR-1
ONN-R
ONN-R2
ONN-R80
ONN-RT
ONN-RT80
ONN-X
ONN-X80
ONN-X96
X
X
F08MR-1
X
X
F06DR80-1
X
F06MR80-1
X
F09DR80-1
X
F09MR80-1
X
X
F09MDRT-1/S
X
X
F09MDRT-1/O
F09MDR96-1
X
O09CC-1
X
F80DCI-1
F80MDI-1
X
X
Fig. 25 Wavelength-Selective Switch Cards
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
27
Hardware & Functionality
2.2.3.1
F40MR-1
SURPASS hiT 7300 supports wavelength selective switching for building a ROADM
providing full access to 40 optical channels. The key component for this application is
the F40MR-1 card which includes an integrated Planar Lightwave Circuit-Wavelength
Selective Switch (PLC-WSS) with low insertion loss, providing a remotely (via
software) reconfigurable optical switching function per individual wavelength.
The input DWDM signal from the line interface (optical pre-amplifier) is split into
express traffic and local drop traffic. The express direction provides an optical input
power monitor for detection of loss-of-signal and laser safety control.
The output DWDM signal toward the line interface (booster or booster-less interface)
of the PLC-WSS, results from a 40-channel multiplexing. These 40 multiplexed
channels are individually selectable (via software) between the 40 incoming express
channels and the 40 local add channels.
For each optical channel to be transmitted, a VOA and an optical power monitor
diode are available.
Fig. 26 F40MR-1 card structure
28
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

Fig. 27 F40MR-1 card structure- HW layout
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
29
Hardware & Functionality
2.2.3.2
F02MR-1
SURPASS hiT 7300 supports wavelength selective switching for building a cost
optimized nodal degree 2 ROADM (i.e., ONN-R2) providing full access to 40 optical
channels.
The key component for this application is the F02MR-1 card which includes in the
transmission path an integrated 2:1 Micro-Electro-Mechanical System - Wavelength
Selective Switch (MEMS-WSS) module, providing a remotely (via software)
reconfigurable optical switching function per individual wavelength.
The incoming signals of the cross-connect are switched with the WSS module on the
common output which is followed by a booster amplifier. One of the inputs of the
WSS is connected to the output of a mux filter where the local add channels are
inserted.
In the receiver path, the incoming signal from the pre-amplifier is launched into a 1x2
splitter with a 40/60 splitting ratio. At the higher output port, a demux filter (F40-1/S)
can be connected for local drop traffic. The other port is the output of the crossconnect. At both inputs of the WSS and the C-COM port of the splitter, LOS monitors
are used for supervision. Also a power monitor is included at the splitter drop output.
Fig. 28 F02MR-1 card structure
30
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality
2.2.3.3

F08MR-1
SURPASS hiT 7300 supports wavelength selective switching for building a multidegree 40-channel PXC providing full access to 40 optical channels. The key
component for this application is the F08MR-1 card which includes an integrated 8:1
MEMS-WSS module, providing a remotely (via software) reconfigurable optical
switching function per individual wavelength.
The input DWDM signal from the line interface (optical pre-amplifier) is split into 7
crossconnect outputs and 1 local drop traffic output. The drop output also provides an
optical input power monitor for detection of Loss Of Signal (LOS) and laser safety
control.
The WSS module collects DWDM traffic from 7 other line ports and 1 local add traffic
input, and performs arbitrary pass-through switching for any wavelength, of the 8
input ports, toward its output port.
The internal cross-connect traffic ports from different F08MR-1 cards (of different line
directions) can be interconnected to allow a configurable pass-through traffic
between arbitrary line directions.
Fig. 29 F08MR-1 card structure
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
31
Hardware & Functionality
2.2.3.4
F09MDRT-1/S and F09MDRT-1/O
The F09MDRT-1/x is a bidirectional tunable WSS card suitable for ONN-RT and
ONNRT80 configurations.
Each drop channel of the WSS is tunable and remotely configurable. The
F09MDRT-1/x contains a 1:9 WSS with 100GHz spacing and a 9:1 coupler
structure. The WSS input port and all coupler input ports C1…C9 are monitored for
LOS, and are equipped with per channel VOAs.
In order to support 80-channel operation with 50GHz spacing, two cards are
required (a standard F09MDRT-1/S card and an offset F09MDRT-1/O card). These
two cards are operated in parallel using an interleaver to support a total of 16
tunable add/drop channels per each transmission direction.
The F9MDRT-1/x card can be used in a ROADM application (mainly for Metro core
networks) or as a non-directional terminal in an ONN-X configuration.
Fig. 30 F09MDRT-1 card structure
32
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality
2.2.3.5

F06DR80-1 and F06MR80-1
The F06DR80-1 and F06MR80-1 cards allow SURPASS hiT 7300 to support
wavelength selective switching for building a multi-degree 80-channel PXC
providing full access to 80 optical channels. The F06DR80-1 and F06MR80-1 cards
include an integrated 1:6 (in the F06DR80-1) or 6:1 (in the F06MR80-1) MEMSWSS module, providing a remotely (via software) reconfigurable optical switching
function per individual wavelength.
The input DWDM signal from the line interface (optical pre-amplifier) is switched per
wavelength by the MEMS-WSS module on the F06DR80-1 card, either to any of the
cross-connect output ports or to one of the two local drop traffic ports, which are
already divided into two 40-channel frequency groups of the standard and offset
grids, respectively, so that no interleaver is required.
The F06DR80-1 provides a LOS monitor for the input signal is provided for laser
safety control at the line interface and each output port is also supervised for overpower detection to ensure laser safety of hazard level 1M.
The output DWDM signal to a line interface (optical booster) is created by the
MEMSWSS module on the F06MR80-1 card, which switches per wavelength from
any of the cross-connect input signals or from one of the two local add traffic ports,
which are already divided into two 40-channel frequency groups of standard and
offset grids.
The internal cross-connect traffic ports from the F06DR80-1 and F06MR80-1 cards
(of different line directions) can be interconnected to allow a configurable passthrough traffic between arbitrary line directions.
Fig. 31 F06DR80-1 and F06MR80-1 cards structure
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
33
Hardware & Functionality
2.2.3.6
F09DR80-1 and F09MR80-1
The F09DR80-1 and F09MR80-1 cards allow SURPASS hiT 7300 to support
wavelength selective switching for building a multi-degree 80-channel PXC
providing full access to 80 optical channels. The F09DR80-1 and F09MR80-1 cards
include an integrated 1:9 (in the F09DR80-1) or 9:1 (in the F09MR80-1) PLC-WSS
module, providing a remotely (via software) reconfigurable optical switching function
per individual wavelength.
The F09DR80-1 card is used as a demultiplexer in an ONN-X80 (in a PXC
architecture with nodal degree of up to 8). It includes a monitor diode at the input
port for LOS detection and signaling via LSB and monitor diodes at the 9 outputs
ports for overpower detection and signaling via LSBus.
The F09MR80-1 card is used as a multiplexer in an ONN-X80 (in an 8x8 PXC
architecture) and in the ONN-R80.
TIP
The F09DR80-1 and F09MR90-1 cards can be used as spares of the F06DR80-1
and F06MR80-1 cards, respectively.
The combination of both the F09DR80-1 and F09MR80-1 cards allows a higher
extinction ratio and better reach when compared to a case where a combination of
WSS and power splitter is used. This measure is of advantage for the narrow channel
spacing.
Fig. 32 F09DR80-1 and F09MR80-1 cards structure
34
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

Fig. 33 F09DR80-1 and F09MR80-1 cards structure HW
Fig. 34 HW layout
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
35
Hardware & Functionality
2.2.3.7
F09MDR96-1
The F09MDR96-1 is a bidirectional tunable WSS card with colorless ports capable of
multiplexing and demultiplexing up to 96 channels. Each card is constituted by two
WSS modules for multiplexing and demultiplexing 9 channels on 50 GHz spacing.
Each card, in the demultiplexing WSS module, includes a monitor diode at the input
port for LOS detection and signaling to laser safety bus and to Fault-Management. At
each output port a monitor diode for overpower detection and signaling to controller
and to laser safety bus.
The Multiplexing WSS has in each input port, monitors for Automatic Port Connection
Detection (APDC), power level measurement and LOS detection.
Fig. 35 F09MDR96-1 card structure
36
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality
2.2.3.8

O09CC-1 Optical Coupler Card
The O09CC-1 is a bidirectional card which implements a Bidirectional SplitterCombiner for Colorless Add/Drop.
The multiplexer part is equipped with a 9:1 combiner. All inputs includes a monitor
diode for LOS detection and signaling to laser safety bus and to Fault-Management.
Demultiplexer part is equipped with a 1:9 splitter. Common input includes a monitor
diode for LOS detection and signaling to laser safety bus and to Fault-Management.
Fig. 36 O09CC-1 card structure
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
37
Hardware & Functionality
2.2.3.9
F80DCI Drop Splitter and Interleaver Card
The F80DCI cards is used in 80-channel ROADM NE's for demultiplexing of an 80channel DWDM signal with 50 GHz spacing by de-interleaving into the corresponding
40-channel standard and offset frequency groups of 100 GHz spacing each.
The F80DCI card contains one optical 50GHz/100GHz interleaver filters, one LOS
monitor for the received 80-channel line signal, and power level monitors for the
outgoing 40-channel signals are used for laser safety control.
Fig. 37 F80DCI-1 card structure
38
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality
2.2.3.10

F80MDI Interleaver Card
The F80MDI cards is used in 80-channel Terminal and OADM NE's for
multiplexing/demultiplexing of an 80-channel DWDM signal with 50 GHz spacing by
interleaving/de-interleaving the corresponding 40-channel standard and offset
frequency groups of 100 GHz spacing each.
The F80MDI card contains 2 optical 50GHz/100GHz interleaver filters, power level
monitors for outgoing 40-channel signals are used for laser safety control. An
auxiliary optical input is provided for later access to auxiliary laser light for transient
suppression (future release) in combination with a monitor port for the 80-channel
output signal.
F80MDI 1 card structure
Fig. 38 F80MDI-1 card structure
Fig. 39 HW layout
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
39
Hardware & Functionality
2.2.4
Applications of Wavelength-Selective Switch Cards
2.2.4.1
ONN-R with F40MR-1 - Wavelength-Selective Switch (WSS) Card
The F40MR card includes an integrated Planar Lightwave Circuit based wavelength
selective switch (PLC-WSS) with low insertion loss, providing a remotely (via SW)
reconfigurable optical switching function per individual wavelength.
The output DWDM signal towards the line interface (booster or booster-less
interface) of the PLC-WSS is a DWDM signal resulting from multiplexing 40 optical
channels which are individually selectable (via SW control) between the 40 incoming
pass-through channels and the 40 local add channels. For each optical channel to be
transmitted a VOA function and an optical power monitor diode are available. The
input DWDM signal from the line interface (optical pre-amplifier) is optically splitted
into pass-through traffic and local drop traffic, where the pass-through direction also
provides an optical input power monitor for detection of loss-of-signal and laser safety
control. The pass-through traffic ports are connected to the pass-through traffic ports
of the F40MR card for the corresponding opposite line direction, thereby achieving
East/West Reparability between the respective DWDM line directions.
The F40MR-1 card provides 45 front connectors within 23 duplex LC/PC connectors
on the front panel for access to all optical ports, it occupies 3 slots (3x 30mm).
ROADM architecture for 40 channels, ONN-R
• Nodal degree 1..5, in-service upgrade from terminal to ROADM
• Alternatively: F02MR based on WSS technology can be used channel power monitors,
and local add filters
• support of patch through on drop side to ROADM node in 2nd ring (ring interconnect)
Fig. 40 F40MR-1 - Wavelength-Selective Switch (WSS) Card
40
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality
2.2.4.2

ONN-R2 with F02MR-1 - Wavelength-Selective Switch (WSS) Card
The F02MR is a cost optimized alternative to the F40MR card. It includes an
integrated MEMS WSS based wavelength selective switch (MEMS-WSS) with low
insertion loss, providing a remotely (via SW) reconfigurable optical switching function
per individual wavelength.
In the Tx path, the key component of this card is the integrated MEMS based 2:1
wavelength selective switch (MEMS-WSS) module, providing a remotely (via NMS)
reconfigurable optical switching function per individual wavelength. The incoming
signals of the cross-connect are switched with the WSS module on the common
output which is followed by a booster amplifier. One of the inputs of the WSS is
connected to the output of a mux filter where the local add channels are inserted.
In the RX path, the incoming signal from the pre-amplifier is launched into a 1x2
splitter with a 40/60 splitting ratio. At the higher output port, a demux filter (F40/S)
can be connected for local drop traffic. The other port is the output of the crossconnect. At both inputs of the WSS and the C-COM port of the splitter, LOS monitors
are used for supervision. Also a power monitor is present at the splitter drop output.
ROADM architecture for 40 channels, ONN-R2
• Nodal degree 1..2, in-service upgrade from terminal to ROADM
• Alternatively: F40MR based on PLC technology can be used with integrated VOAs,
channel power monitors, and local add filters
• East-west separation per design
• support of patch through on drop side to ROADM node in 2nd ring (ring interconnect)
For internal use
Fig. 41 F02MR-1 - Wavelength-Selective Switch (WSS) Card
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
41
Hardware & Functionality
2.2.4.3
ONN-X with F08MR card 40-Channel Multi-Degree WavelengthSelective Switch (MEMS-WSS)
The F08MR card which includes an integrated MEMS based 8:1 wavelength
selective switch (MEMS-WSS) module, providing a remotely (via SW) reconfigurable
optical switching function per individual wavelength.
The input DWDM signal from a line interface (optical pre-amplifier) is optically splitted
into 7 cross-connect outputs and 1 local drop traffic output, where the drop output
also provides an optical input power monitor for detection of loss-of-signal and laser
safety control. The WSS module collects DWDM traffic from 7 other line ports and 1
local add traffic input and performs arbitrary pass-through switching for any
wavelengths from any input of its 8 input ports towards its output port.
The internal cross-connect traffic ports from different F08MR cards (of different line
directions) can be optically interconnected to allow for configurable pass-through
traffic between arbitrary line directions.
The MEMS-WSS unit supports hitless wavelength switching for any unchanged
optical channel interconnections.
Photonic Cross Connect (PXC) for 40 channels
Local add
F40/S WDM trunk
8 port
WDM trunk
8 ports
Local drop
F40/S
F08MR
West
(trunk 1)
Amplifier
Splitter
Channel Filter
•
•
•
•
•
F08MR
100GHz
WSS
East
(trunk 2)
100GHz
WSS
F40/S
F40/S
WDM trunk
8 ports
local drop
WDM trunk
8 ports
local add
PXC, supporting nodal degree 8
one WSS for channels add and one splitter for channel drop per nodal degree
fully remotely configurable
east-west separation
(only two degree shown in figure)
For internal use
Fig. 42 F08MR-1 - Wavelength-Selective Switch (WSS) Card
42
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality
2.2.4.4

ONN-RT - The 8 or 16-Channel Metro Tunable ROADM with MultiDegree Wavelength-Selective Switch (MEMS-WSS)
The F09MDRT-1/x is a bidirectional tunable WSS card. Each of the drop channels of
the WSS is tunable and remotely configurable. I contains a 9x1 WSS with 100GHz
spacing and a 9x1 coupler structure. In order to support 80 channel operation with
50GHz spacing, two cards are required with a /S and /O variant of the WSS card.
These two cards are operated in parallel using an interleaver and this combination
supports a total of 2x8 channels of tunable add/drop.
8ch/16ch Metro Tunable ROADM – 40/80 channels
Per ch VOA
F09MDRT
West
(trunk 1)
100GHz
WSS
100GHz
WSS
East
(trunk 2)
F09MDRT
Per ch VOA
• Each add/drop wavelength is tunable and remotely configurable
• Nodal degree 1..2 incl. in-service upgrade
• 80 channel via interleaver and 2x 8ch add/drop with off set grid card F09MDRT /O
For internal use
Fig. 43 F09MDRT-1 - Wavelength-Selective Switch (WSS) Card used as ONN-RT
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
43
Hardware & Functionality
2.2.4.5
ONN-X with F0xDR80 and the F0xMR80 cards (80-Channel MultiDegree Wavelength-Selective Switch (MEMS-WSS))
The F0xDR80 and the F0xMR80 cards each including an integrated MEMS based
1:6 (6:1) or 1:9 (9:1) wavelength selective switch (MEMS-WSS) module, providing a
remotely (via SW) reconfigurable optical switching function per individual wavelength.
The input DWDM signal from a line interface (optical pre-amplifier) is switched per
wavelength by the MEMS-WSS unit on the F0xDR80 card, either to any of crossconnect output ports or to one of the two local drop traffic ports, which are already
divided into two 40-channel frequency groups of standard grid and offset grid,
respectively, so that no further interleaver is needed. A LOS monitor for the input
signal is provided for laser safety control at the line interface and each output port is
also supervised for overpower detection to ensure laser safety of hazard level 1M.
The output DWDM signal to a line interface (optical booster) is created by the MEMSWSS unit on the F0xMR80 card, which switches per wavelength from any of the
cross-connect input signals or from one of the two local add traffic ports, which are
already divided (by the feeding multiplexer cards, not shown in Figure) into two 40channel frequency groups of standard grid and offset grid.
The internal cross-connect traffic ports from F0xDR80 and F0xMR80 cards (of
different line directions) can be optically interconnected to allow for configurable
pass-through traffic between arbitrary line directions.
The MEMS-WSS units support hitless wavelength switching for any unchanged
optical channel interconnections.
44
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

Remotely configurable ROADM – 80 channels
Local add
Local add
F40/S
Local drop
Local drop
F40V/S
50GHz
WSS
West
(trunk 1)
Splitter
Channel Filter
Interleaver
Amplifier
F40/O
F40V/O
C
F40V/S
Local drop
F40V/O
Local drop
East
(trunk 2)
50GHz
WSS
F80DCI
C
F80DCI
F06MR80
F06MR80
F40/O
F40/S
Local add
Local add
• Nodal degree 2, in-service upgrade from terminal to ROADM
• Power monitoring per channel via one MCP card
• East-west separation per design
For internal use
Fig. 44 F06MR80-1 - Wavelength-Selective Switch (WSS) Card used as ONN-R80
PXC with double WSS structure for 80 channels
incl. local add drop
Local add
F40/S
Local add
F40V/O
Local drop
F40/S
WDM trunk 6 or 8
WDM trunk 6 or 8
50GHz
WSS
50GHz
WSS
West
(Trunk 1)
F0xMR80
F0xDR80
F0xDR80
F0xMR80
WDM trunk 6 or 8
F40/S
Local drop
East
(Trunk 2)
50GHz
WSS
50GHz
WSS
Amplifier
Channel Filter
Local drop
F40V/O
WDM trunk 6 or 8
F40/O
Local drop
F40/S
Local add
F40/O
Local add
• Nodal degree 5 or 8, plus local add/drop
• Drop amplifiers (type LAS) for increased power budget and reach
• (only two directions shown in figure)
For internal use
Fig. 45 F0xMR80-1 and F0xDR80-1 - Wavelength-Selective Switch (WSS) Card
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
45
Hardware & Functionality
2.2.4.6
ONN-X96 with F09MDR96-1 cards (MEMS-WSS))
The F09MDR96-1 card include an integrated MEMS based 1:9 (9:1) wavelength
selective switch (MEMS-WSS) module, providing a remotely (via SW) reconfigurable
optical switching function per individual wavelength.
The input DWDM signal from a line interface (optical pre-amplifier) is switched per
wavelength by the MEMS-WSS unit on the F09MDR96-1 card, either to any of crossconnect output ports or to one of the two local drop traffic ports, which are already
divided into two 48-channel frequency groups of standard grid and offset grid,
respectively, so that no further interleaver is needed. A LOS monitor for the input
signal is provided for laser safety control at the line interface and each output port is
also supervised for overpower detection to ensure laser safety of hazard level 1M.
The output DWDM signal to a line interface (optical booster) is created by the MEMSWSS unit on the F09MDR96-1 card, which switches per wavelength from any of the
cross-connect input signals or from one of the two local add traffic ports, which are
already divided (by the feeding multiplexer cards, not shown in Figure) into two 48channel frequency groups of standard grid and offset grid.
The internal cross-connect traffic ports from F09MDR96-1 cards (of different line
directions) can be optically interconnected to allow for configurable pass-through
traffic between arbitrary line directions.
The MEMS-WSS units support hitless wavelength switching for any unchanged
optical channel interconnections.
46
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

Photonic cross connect PXC – 96 channels
LABPC
LABBC
WSS 9x1
WSS 9x1
OTSC
Express
channels
MCP
Express
channels
F09MDR96-1
F09MDR96-1
MCP
OTSC
WSS 9x1
WSS 9x1
LABBC
LABPC
F48MDP-1/S
F48MDP-1/O
F48MDP-1/S
F48MDP-1/O
Add/drop
Add/drop
Add/drop
channels
Add/drop
channels
• Nodal degree 1 up to 8, in-service upgrade from terminal to PXC
• Power monitoring per channel MCP card
• East-west separation per design
For internal use
Fig. 46 F09MDR96-1 - Wavelength-Selective Switch (WSS) Card used as ONN-X96
Directionless and colorless PXC – ONN-X96
LABPC
LABBC
WSS 9x1
Express
channels
WSS 9x1
F09MDR96-1
F09MDR96-1
WSS 9x1
Express
channels
WSS 9x1
LABBC
LABPC
WSS 9x1
F09MDR96-1
WSS 1x9
O09CC-1
WSS 9x1
Add/drop channels
For internal use
F09MDR96
WSS 1x9
…
Add/drop channels
WSS 9x1
F09MDR96
Add/drop channels
WSS 1x9
Add/drop channels
… to transponder cards – max. 81 wavelengths …
Fig. 47 F09MDR96-1 - Directionless and colorless PXC for 96 channels
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
47
Hardware & Functionality
2.3
2.3.1
Amplification scheme
EDFA amplifiers
The Line Amplifier (LA) cards provide the signal amplification by featuring a gain
block with one or two pump lasers, inter-stage access for dispersion compensation,
and digital gain control.
SURPASS hiT7300 offers various types of amplifier cards well suited for various
network scenarios, depending on the required performance of the span. The amplifier
design is multi-stage and modular. This allows for “application optimized” solutions
and “cost optimized” choice of amplifiers. The modular amplifier design ensures the
lowest possible CAPEX investment for each supported network scenario.
LA cards are divided in three types of amplification (inline, booster and preamplifier):
• Inline amplifiers contain an optical inline amplifier for C band and are used at inline
sites for optical amplification of the signal. The output power of the cards can be
increased by pump cards and Raman pump cards.
• Booster amplifiers contain an optical booster amplifier for C band and are used at
terminal sites for amplifying the outgoing line signal. In one link direction, there is
only one booster. The output power of these cards can be increased by pump
cards.
• Pre-amplifiers contain an optical preamplifier for C band and are used at terminal
sites for amplifying the incoming line signal before it is fed into the demultiplexing
stage. In one link direction, there is only one preamplifier. The output power of the
cards can be increased by pump cards and Raman pump cards.
Additionally, the various types of amplifiers can be categorized into 3 generic types:
•
•
•
•
•
Line Amplifier Short Span (LASx)
Line Amplifier Medium Span (LAMx)
Line Amplifier Long Span (LALx)
Line Amplifier Very Long Span (LAVx)
Line Amplifier Broadband for 96 channels (LABx)
TIP
All the amplifier cards also have internal bus connection for EOW, user channel
access and APSD control functions.
48
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

The following table lists all the SURPASS hiT7300 EDFA Amplifier cards:
Card name
Usage
Types of amplification
LAVBC-1; LAVBCH-1
Very Long; OSC high
power
Booster amplifier
(low noise figure)
LAVIC-2
Very Long
Inline amplifier (low noise figure)
LALBC-1; LALBCH-1
Long; OSC high power
Booster amplifier
LALIC-1
Long spans
Inline amplifier
LALPC-1
Long spans
Pre-amplifier
LAMIC-1
Medium spans
Inline amplifier
LAMPC-1
Medium spans
Pre-amplifier
LASBC-1
Short spans
Booster amplifier
LIFB-1
Short spans
Booster-less line interface card
LIFPB-1
Passive short span
Amplifier-less line interface card
LABBC-1
Medium to Very Long
spans (96 ch)
Booster amplifier
LABIC-1
Medium to Very Long
spans (96 ch)
Inline amplifier
LABPC-1
Medium to Very Long
spans (96 ch)
Pre-amplifier
Fig. 48 EDFA amplifiers
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
49
Hardware & Functionality
2.3.1.1
Line Amplifier for Short Span (LASBC)
The LASBC amplifier is an EDFA dual-stage amplifier card designed for short span
applications without Interstage access. LASBC can be used as a booster amplifier in
all ONN node types. The EDFA “Stage 1” is optimized for amplification of a low
power signal and therefore for low noise amplification. With a Gain Flattening Filter
(GFF) and an automatically controlled Variable Optical Attenuator (VOA) between
EDFA stages 1 and 2, the excellent gain flatness is achieved over a wide range of
gain settings.
An external monitor interface for connection to an Optical Spectrum Analyzer or the
optical channel power monitor card is also available for external signal monitoring
functions. The amplifier also has internal signal monitoring functions on the board.
The OSC (Optical Supervisory Channel) termination is done locally on the card and
control information is digitally forwarded into the main controller.
The EDFA “Stage 2” does the final amplification of the DWDM signal before it reenters the fiber, allowing for maximum reach.
2.3.1.2
Line Amplifiers for Medium Span (LAMPC, LAMIC)
The LAMPC and LAMIC cards are dual-stage EDFA amplifier cards for medium span
applications and provide an additional “Interstage” access port for dispersion
compensation. The LAMPC can be used as a preamplifier card in all the ONN node
types, and the LAMIC card can be used as an in-line amplifier card in the OLR
nodes.
The interstage access points between each EDFA section allow for the addition of
inline optical components to enhance the performance of the amplification process as
well as the overall network performance. The interstage port can be optionally
interconnected with either a Dispersion Compensation Fiber (DCF) or a Fiber Bragg
Grating (FBG) card depending on type of fiber choice and dispersion compensation
requirement of the network.
The EDFA “Stage 1” together with the Variable Optical Attenuator (VOA) provides
moderate optical amplification so that the output signal level is appropriate for
interconnection to a dispersion-compensating device interconnected at the interstage
access port.
All the attenuation incurred by any interstage optical device is already calculated in
the optical link budget and the “Stage 2” EDFA provides optimum amplification for the
following span.
All other functions such as OSC extraction and insertion, internal and external signal
monitoring and gain flattening filter are also available.
50
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

Line Amplifier Short Span ( LASBC)
Variable Optical
Attenuator( VOA )
INPUT
EDFA
Stage 1
OSC
filter
OUTPUT
EDFA
Stage 2
GFF
External
Monitor
Int.Mon
Fig. 49 Line Amplifier for Short Span (LASBC)
Interstage
access port:
Optional DCF
or FBG
Line Amplifier Medium Span (LAMPC, LAMIC)
INPUT
Variable Optical
Attenuator ( VOA )
OSC
filter
EDFA
Stage 1
GFF
OSC
filter
OUTPUT
EDFA
Stage 2
External
Monitor
Int.Mon
Fig. 50 Line Amplifiers for Medium Span (LAMPC, LAMIC)
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
51
Hardware & Functionality
2.3.1.3
Line Amplifiers Long and Very Long Span (LALBC, LALBCH, LALIC,
LALPC , LAVBC and LAVIC)
The LALBC/LALIC/LALPC amplifier cards provide three-stage EDFA amplification for
long span applications. The LALBC can be used as booster amplifier card, and the
LALPC can be used as preamplifier card in all ONN node types, whereas the LALIC
can be used as in-line amplifier in OLR nodes.
All LALxC cards provide all the features provided by LASBC and LAMxC cards and
further provide “Stage 3” amplification with optional access to an external PUMP card
for extra amplification in applications with very long spans and/or high number of
optical channels.
The LALxC cards can also compensate for higher attenuation at their interstage
access port, which is useful for cascading of dispersion compensation cards.
TIP
The difference between LALBC and LALBCH is that LALBCH contains a high power
OSC laser which provides for a maximum span loss of 50 dB at 1510nm OSC
wavelength (corresponding to about 48.5 dB span attenuation of G.652 fiber within Cband).
The LAVBC and LAVIC amplifier cards are similar to the LALxC cards, but generate
just a low noise figure.
2.3.1.4
Line Amplifiers for 96 channel system (LABBC, LABIC and LABPC)
The LABBC/LABIC/LABPC amplifier cards provide three-stage EDFA amplification
for medium to very long span applications. The LABBC can be used as booster
amplifier card, and the LABPC can be used as preamplifier card in all network
elements supporting the 96 channel structure, whereas the LABIC can be used as inline amplifier in OLR nodes.
TIP
The LABxC amplifier do not support DCM modules. They where designed for the
DCM free transmission and have due to this no interstage access.
52
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

Fig. 51 HW layout amplifier
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
53
Hardware & Functionality
2.3.1.5
Optical Amplifier Features
Optimum Amplifier Gain Setting and Fast Gain Control:
Each hiT7300 amplifier is designed to have the optimum gain flatness over the entire
wavelength spectrum for a particular value of total amplifier gain. In order to keep the
EDFA's operating at a particular optimum gain, while allowing for a wide range of
span losses, an automatically controlled VOA is used between the first and second
stage of the amplifier.
A fast control loop (analogue and/or digital) is implemented to keep the gain value
constant within the allowed range of overall system transient behavior. This ensures
that even abrupt changes in the input signal power, such as those caused by channel
losses, will not cause excessive bit errors or degradations in the individual channels.
Interstage
Access Port:
Optional DCF
or FBG
Stage 3
Optional:
Pump card
Line Amplifier Long Span (LALBC, LALIC, LALPC)
INPUT
Variable Optical
Attenuator( VOA )
OSC
filter
EDFA
Stage 1
OSC
filter
EDFA
Stage 2
GFF
OUTPUT
EDFA
Stage 3
External
Monitor
Int.Mon
Fig. 52 Line Amplifiers Long Span (LALBC, LALIC, LALPC)
54
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

Amplifier Output Power Control:
Based on the number of channels equipped in the DWDM system and the required
EDFA output power per channel, the total output power of an EDFA can be
determined. This total EDFA output power is kept constant via a slow output power
control loop, to compensate for degradations or fluctuations in the fiber attenuation.
Hence, the typical physical changes in fiber properties (e.g. due to aging) will have no
influence on ongoing system performance.
Output
Output Power
Power Control
Control
(slow
(slow loop)
loop)
Input
Power
Digital
Digital Gain
Gain Control
Control
(fast
(fast loop)
loop)
Output
Power
DCM
VOA
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Fig. 53 Optical Amplifier Features
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
55
Hardware & Functionality
2.3.2
Amplifier-less Line Interfaces (LIFB / LIFPB)
LIFB-1 card is a unidirectional booster-less line interface card for the transmit
direction of a DWDM line interface; this card can replace a booster amplifier card
(LASB) for short span applications.
LIFPB-1 card is a bidirectional amplifier-less line interface card for a DWDM line
interface, this card can replace booster and pre-amplifier cards (LASB, LAMP) for
passive short span applications.
The LIFB-1/LIFPB-1 cards provide the following functions:
• OSC termination (LIFB: only for Tx direction; LIFPB: for both Tx/Rx directions), in
order to support all OSC functions (optical link control, EOW, user channels, etc.)
as usual amplifier cards.
• Optical output monitor connector(s) for optical channel power monitoring either by
an external optical spectrum analyzer (OSA) or the MCP4xx monitoring card
(LIFB: only for Tx direction; LIFPB: for both Tx/Rx directions).
56
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

MonSo
OUT
LIFPB-1
LIFB
Input Monitor
OSC Tx
Signal Tap
OSC Filter
OSC Tx
B-IN
Signal Tap
MonSo
OSC Filter
Signal Tap
P-OUT
Input Monitor
Signal
Tap
Signal Tap
OSC Filter
B-OUT
P-IN
Signal Tap
OSC Rx
Input Monitor
IN
MonSo
Fig. 54 Amplifier-less Line Interface (LIFB and LIFPB)
Fig. 55 HW layout
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
57
Hardware & Functionality
2.3.3
Amplifier Pump Cards
To account for the variable optical conditions in backbone networks, such as different
span lengths, fiber types and fiber properties, SURPASS hiT7300 has developed an
external amplifier pump implementation. By equipping the external pump card PL-1 in
combination with the LALx amplifier cards, a higher output power of these amplifiers
can be achieved. By equipping the Raman pump card PRC-1 in combination
(counter-directional) with the LALPC-1 pre-amplifier card or LALIC-1 in-line amplifier
card, a higher gain can be achieved for the respective span.
2.3.3.1
External PUMP Card (PL-1)
The external pump card (PL-1) is used to increase the output power of the
preamplifier, booster amplifier and inline amplifiers on the various amplifier cards.
The PL-1 is an active card, which means it is equipped with its own card controller. It
also contains an on-board EEPROM to store card inventory data that can be
requested by the network management system.
58
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

Laser
diodes
Polarization
Beam
Combiner.
PL-1
Line Amplifier Long Span LALBC
INPUT
Internal
Monitor
Stage 3
Optional:
Interstage Access
Port for DCM
Variable Optical
Attenuator( VOA )
OSC
filter
EDFA
Stage 1
OSC
filter
EDFA
Stage 2
GFF
OUTPUT
EDFA
Stage 3
External
Monitor
Int.Mon
Fig. 56 External PUMP Card
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
59
Hardware & Functionality
2.3.4
Raman amplification
To extend the distances between NE's (high loss spans) SURPASS hiT7300
optionally employs Raman amplification.
The basis of Raman amplification is the energy scattering effect called Stimulated
Raman Scattering (SRS), a non-linear effect inherent to the fiber itself. SRS involves
a transfer of power from an optical pump signal at a higher frequency (lower
wavelength) to one at a lower frequency (higher wavelength), due to inelastic
collisions in the fiber medium. If on optical pump wavelength is launched backwards
into the end of a transmission fiber it propagates upstream in the opposite direction of
the optical traffic wavelength, this is called counterdirectional pumping. The pump
wavelength induces the SRS effect resulting in amplification of the optical traffic
wavelength. With a sufficient amount of pump wavelength power the optical traffic
wavelength slowly starts to deviate from the usual linear decrease, reaches a
minimum level and finally increases when approaching the fiber end The distributed
Raman amplification process results in an improvement of the OSNR budget by
several dB thereby allowing networks with very long transmission span in
combination with optical booster and preamplifiers.
2.3.4.1
Raman Pump Card (PRC-x)
The following picture shows the simplified internal architecture of the Raman pump
card (PRC-x). The pump signals from the Laser diodes are first multiplexed from two
different wavelengths, and the multiplexed pump light is counterdirectionally coupled
into the fiber carrying the received traffic signal. By appropriate power settings for the
two pump wavelengths, a flat gain spectrum can be achieved for different fiber types.
The pump laser power is controlled via external monitor diodes and the output power
is set by software. All pump lasers are also temperature controlled to maintain their
stability. Two optical monitor ports are provided, one monitors the Raman output
power and the other one monitors the line power.
The Raman PUMP card is utilized together with the LALPC or LALIC amplifier card to
increase the possible length of a span.
TIP
The card PRC-1 is designed for the 40 and 80 channel system. The card PRC-2 is
designed for the 96 channel system and has a broader channel spectrum which is
amplified.
TIP
For Automatic Power Shut Down (APSD) an on board detection of the OSC carrier
frequency is designed. The OSC signal is scrambled to have enough carrier signal
power to provide APSD function.
Due to the laser pumps and the complexity of the card, the PRC-x occupies two 30
mm slots of the shelf.
60
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

2
0
RPump EDFA
Power in dBm
-2
Signal
Pump
Light
-4
-6
-8
-10
-12
-14
-16
-18
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
Route Length in km
Fig. 57 Raman amplification
Raman Pump Amplifier Card
Variable Optical
Attenuator( VOA )
OSC
filter
OSC
Monitor
Line
Output
EDFA
Stage 1
Int.
APSD
Int.Mon
Controller
Logic Unit
Pumping
direction
INPUT
WDM
(2ch)
Line RPump
Monitor Monitor
Line
INPUT
Line PreAmplifier Long Span LALPC
Fig. 58 Raman Pump Card (PRC-1)
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
61
Hardware & Functionality
2.3.4.2
EDFA & Raman hybrid amplifier cards (LRBIC-1 / LRBPC-1)
To simplify network management, the Raman pump card (PRC-2) and either the line
amplifier card (LABIC-1) or the pre-amplifier card (LABPC-1) can be logically
combined into a single card cluster, which offers the following:
• Combined LRBxC-1 (LABxC and PRC-2 card) supporting all features from LABxC1 and PRC-2
• Implementation of Raman padding or Raman pump power control by LABxC
• Cards have to be placed in adjacent slots (future plans to have LABxC controlled
as single card by the management system)
TIP
For LRBIC-1 and LRBPC-1 cards technical specifications see the respective LABIC-1
and LABPC-1 cards and PRC-2 technical specifications.
62
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

To simplify network management, the Raman pump card (PRC-2) and either the line amplifier
card (LABIC-1) or the pre-amplifier card (LABPC-1) can be logically combined into a single card
cluster , which offers the following:
• Combined LRBxC-1 (LABxC and PRC-2 card) supporting all features from LABxC-1 and
PRC-2
• Implementation of Raman padding or Raman pump power control by LABxC
• Cards have to be placed in adjacent slots (future plans to have LABxC controlled as single
card by the management system)
LRBIC
MCP4
CCSP-1
PRC-2
LABP C-1
PRC-2
PRC-2
Super Raman
pump
LABI C-1
Booster
CFSU-1
LABI C-1
LRBPC
PRC-2
Preamplifier
Super Raman
Pump
LABP C-1
Fig. 59 Hybrid Amplifier Card (LRBxC-1)
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
63
Hardware & Functionality
2.4
Dispersion compensation scheme
The chromatic dispersion has the effect of ‘spreading’ the signal spectrum so much
that the inter-symbol interference no longer allows an accurate determination of a
single ‘one’ bit or a single ‘zero’ bit. Dispersion compensation is used to counteract
the chromatic dispersion which a signal undergoes as it travels through a section of
optical fiber. Depending on the bit rate a system can tolerate a certain degree of
dispersion; the rest has to be compensated for to avoid bit errors. This can be done
in different ways, using pre- and post-compensation, so a kind of saw tooth profile
results. The important fact is that the total allowable dispersion at the receive side is
not exceeded.
2.4.1
Dispersion Compensation Cards
The DCM's (Dispersion Compensation modules) are utilizing either Fiber Bragg
Gratings (FBG) or Dispersion Compensating Fiber (DCF). DCF is a spool of fiber with
the opposite dispersion characteristics of the fiber used for signal transmission,
hence ‘compressing’ the signal for better optical performance. FBG's are based on
chirped fiber grating technology and offer smaller footprint, very low insertion loss,
and lower nonlinear effects compared to DCF.
In hiT 7300 the DCM modules are in most cases integrated on DCM cards which are
physically equipped in the hiT 7300 shelf as all other equipment and are managed by
the NE controller. For special applications, where FBG-based DCMs are not available
or cannot be used (e.g. for compensation of critical transmission lines with 40G
channels or for 80-channel transmission lines), or for dispersion compensation of
special fiber types, DCF-based external DCMs can be used which are mounted
within a separate DCM shelf within the rack.
The front panel of a DCM cards contains two optical connectors, one input port of the
DWDM signal before dispersion compensation and one for output port of the DWDM
signal after dispersion compensation. The DCM input and output ports are connected
to the interstage access port of an optical amplifier.
There are various DCM card types available for providing dispersion compensation of
different lengths and types of transmission fibers. A certain DCM module on a DCM
card is denoted by the card name.
TIP
The strategy for choosing DCM's is highly system dependent and is influenced by the
optical performance limiting effect. The implementation of the DCM strategy and the
correct calculation of the required residual dispersion is a feature of the network
design tool SURPASS TransNet. Both DCM types can be combined to achieve the
optimum network performance and the lowest system cost.
64
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Dispersion
Hardware & Functionality
0

DCF
DCF
DCF
Dmax
Distance
DCF
Fig. 60 Dispersion compensation scheme
Dispersion Compensation Cards
(DCF and FBG)
FBG
Dispersion Compensation Fiber
Optical
Circulator
OUT
In
DCF
In
Red
OUT
F
B
G
Blue
Fiber Bragg Gratings
Termination
Fig. 61 Dispersion Compensation Cards
DCF
In
Line Amplifier Long Span LALBC
INPUT
OUT
Interstage Access
Port for DCM
Variable Optical
Attenuator( VOA )
OSC
filter
EDFA
Stage 1
OSC
filter
EDFA
Stage 2
GFF
OUTPUT
EDFA
Stage 3
External
Monitor
Fig. 62 Example of DCM usage
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
65
Hardware & Functionality
Fig. 63 HW layout
66
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality
2.5

Transponder, Muxponder, and Regenerator
Functions
Each transponder or muxponder (=multiplexing transponder) converts one or several
of its client signals of grey or CWDM wavelength into a colored line signal with
specific DWDM wavelength according to the hiT7300 wavelength plan. Each
transponder line interface provides an excellent span performance for regional as
well as long haul networks by using optical DWDM modules with high dispersion
tolerance in combination with FEC or SUPER-FEC ((SUPER-) Forward Error
Correction). Each transponder/muxponder card can also support optical channel
protection (OChP) for its line interface(s), which allows carrier-class survivability for
its client services.
2.5.1
hiT7300 Transponder, Muxponder, and Regenerator
Cards
The SURPASS hiT7300 transponder, muxponder, and regenerator cards offer a
broad range of fully transparent data transmission services for various user
applications. They are designed for interfacing to optical channels of data rate levels
2.5 Gb/s and 10 Gb/s within an Optical Transport Network (OTN) and support all the
fault supervision and performance monitoring functions according ITU-T G.709.
TIP
Note that SURPASS hiT7300 transponder cards can be used as integral part of
SURPASS hiT7300 NE's, or alternatively for interworking with SURPASS hiT7500 or
any other 3rd party DWDM equipment.
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
67
Hardware & Functionality
The following transponder card types are supported:
Typical
Line bit
rate
(Gbit/s)
Transport network
Error
Correction
Type of
hotpluggable
modules
I04T2G5
2.50
Regio
FEC
SFP &
DWDM-SFP
I01T10G
10.00
LHD/LH/Regio/Regio80/Metro
FEC / S-FEC
XFP
I08T10G
10.00
LHD/LH/Regio/Regio80/Metro
FEC / S-FEC
SFP
I04TQ10G
10.00
LHD/LH/Regio/Regio80/Metro
FEC / S-FEC
XFP
I05AD10G
10.00
Regio
FEC
SFP &
DWDM-XFP
I22CE10G
10.00
LHD/LH/Regio/Regio80/Metro
FEC / S-FEC
SFP, SFP+,
XFP
I01T40G
40.00
S-FEC
---
I01R40G
40.00
S-FEC
---
I04T40G
40.00
S-FEC
XFP
Card name
68
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

Fig. 64 Multipurpose Modular Transponder, Muxponder, and Regenerator Cards
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
69
Hardware & Functionality
The table on the next page gives an overview of the different transponder cards with
their possible client interfaces.
For the 10G transponder/muxponder cards, the following optical variants of the 10G
colored line interfaces are available on the respective card variant as denoted by the
following suffixes:
• Metro: optimized for passive metro networks with 40 channels (up to 80 km reach)
using fixed wavelength;
• Regio: optimized for regional networks (up to 600 km reach w/ optical amplifiers)
with fixed wavelength;
• Regio80: optimized for regional networks with 40/80 channels (up to 600 km reach
w/ optical amplifiers) using fixed wavelength;
• LH: optimized for long haul networks (up to 1600 km reach w/ optical amplifiers)
with tunable wavelength;
• LHD: optimized for ultra long haul networks with 40/80 channels (up to 2000 km
reach w/ optical amplifiers) using tunable wavelength, and with increased
chromatic and polarization mode dispersion tolerance by MLSE (Maximum
Likelihood Sequence Estimation) signal processing;
• LHS: optimized for long haul networks (up to 1600 km reach w/ optical amplifiers)
via sea cable system with tunable wavelength;
• LHDS: optimized for ultra long haul networks with 40/80 channels (up to 2000 km
reach w/ optical amplifiers) via sea cable system using tunable wavelength, and
with increased chromatic and polarization mode dispersion tolerance by MLSE
(Maximum Likelihood Sequence Estimation) signal processing;
• DPS: Modulation is DPSK: Differential Phase Shift Keying used by 40Gbit/s cards
• CQP: Modulation is CP-QPSK: Coherent Polarization Differential Quad Phase
Shift Keying used by 40 Gbit/s cards for DCM free transmission.
• CQPS: like CQP but for sea cable application
70
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

Overview of available Client Interfaces
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
I04T40G1 (/CQP)
OTU-3
X
I01T40G1 (/CQP)
OTU-2
X
I22CE10G
OTU-1
I04TQ10G
X
any- rate
X
X
100M3.4G
X
X
X
X
I01T10G
I05AD10G
FC-10G
X
X
FC-8G
X
X
FC-4G
X
FC-2G
X
FC-1G
10 GE
1 GE
I08T10G
STM-256
X
STM-64
STM-16
STM-4
STM-1
I04T2G5
X
X
X
X
• SAN services certification: IBM System Storage Proven
TM
For internal use
Fig. 65 Transponder cards with possible line and client interfaces
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
71
Hardware & Functionality
2.5.1.1
I04T2G5-1 card
The 2.5G transponder/muxponder functionality is realized by the I04T2G5-1 card.
The card provides the following traffic interfaces:
• 2 pluggable (SFP modules) DWDM line ports;
• 4 pluggable (SFP modules) client ports for the following client interface types:
Up to 2x STM-16/OC-48, or up to 4x GE (1000Base-X/T), or up to 4x FC 1G, or up
to 2x FC 2G, or up to 2x OTU-1 (w/o FEC).
All traffic ports are realized hot pluggable SFP modules which can be equipped
depending on the specific traffic demands for this card, thus providing lowest CAPEX
by a single card type for many different applications. For optical client ports, both
uncolored and CWDM interfaces are supported.
The electrical and optical Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) SFP interfaces available for the
client ports of the I04T2G5-1 card.
The card can be used as transponder/muxponder or as 3R-regenerator card,
depending on its configuration.
In case the I04T2G5-1 operates as a transponder/muxponder card, the card offers
access for 1 or 2 optical channels with OTU-1 standard data rate (2.67 Gb/s) and
FEC acc. ITU-T G.709 at its line interfaces. The required wavelength, which has
been determined by the TransNet planning tool, is realized by plugging the correct
DWDM SFP module, which is verified by the NE’s controller function.
In case the I04T2G5-1 operates as a 3R-regenerator card, only the two line interface
modules are equipped for bidirectional regeneration of an OTU-1 optical channel.
The 2 OTU-1 line interfaces can also be configured for optical channel protection.
The I04T2G5-1 transponder/muxponders implements standard compliant mapping
schemes of all client signals types into an OTU-1 optical channel acc. ITU-T G.806
and G.709.
In case of Gigabit Ethernet (GE) or 1 Gigabit FiberChannel (FC-1G) client signals, 2
client signals are mapped into the OPU1 payload of an OTU-1 optical channel via
GFP-T generic framing procedure and GFP-T frame multiplexing acc. ITU-T G.7041.
This provides a fully transparent transmission of GE services at wire speed over the
optical transport network and at the same time achieves efficient bandwidth utilization
of the OTU1 optical channel. Mapping via GFP-T avoids any intermediate mapping
into SDH/SONET layers and thus simplifies management of GE services. Fault
supervision and performance monitoring are possible at OCh and
Ethernet/FiberChannel layers for monitoring GE/FibreChannel traffic in both ingress
and egress directions.
In case of an STM-16/OC-48 SDH/SONET client signal, one such client signal is
mapped into an OPU1 payload of an OTU-1 optical channel acc. ITU-T G.709.
In case of an OTU-1 client signal (IrDI), the ODU1 optical data unit is transparently
passed between client and line interface for providing a transparent optical channel
including payload and ODU1 overhead.
72
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

I04T2G5 universal 2.5G Mux/Transponder Card
4 client interfaces
STM-1/OC-3 or
I04T2G5
DWDM
SFP
Framing and mapping
DWDM
SFP
OTU-1 or
STM-16/OC-48 or
GE or
FC-1G or
Framing and mapping
DWDM
SFP
FC-2G
transponder 2 x
STM-16/OC48/FC-2G
2 line interfaces
OTU-1
3R
Regeneration
Optical Channel
Protection
DWDM
SFP
DWDM
SFP
DWDM
SFP
transponder 1 x STM16/OC48/
FC-2G with line IF protection
OTU-1
OTU-1 regenerator
muxponder 2 x
(2 x FC 1G/GE/STM-1/OC3)
muxponder 2 x FC-1G/
GE/STM-1/OC3 w/ line IF protection
Best-in-class flexibility: 4 different functionalities in one card
Transponder, Muxponder, Regenerator, Protection
For internal use
Fig. 66 2.5G Transponder/Muxponder/Regenerator Card I04T2G5
I04T2G5 Universal 2.5G Mux/Transponder Card
Mapping of client signals
Client IF
(a)
Line IF
GE, FC-1G, STM-1
1.25 Gb/s, 1.0625 Gb/s,
155 Mb/s
GFP-T
GFP
MX/DX
GE, FC-1G, STM-1
1.25 Gb/s, 1.0625 Gb/s,
155 Mb/s
(b)
FC-2G
2.125 Gb/s
(c)
STM16 / OC48
2.488320 Gb/s
(d)
OTU-1
2.6660514 Gb/s
asyn.
OPU1
OTU1
OChr
2.6660514 Gb/s
OPU1
OTU1
OChr
2.6660514 Gb/s
GFP-T
asyn.
GFP-T
asyn.
GFP-T
ODU1
OTU1
OChr
2.6660514 Gb/s
OTU-1
ODU1
OTU1
OChr
2.6660514 Gb/s
(w/o FEC)
• (a) 2xGE, or 2xFC-1G, or 2xSTM1, or any mixture mapped into one OTU1
• (d) client side GCC0 support in-line management of connected remote NT
• direct mapping into OTU („Ethernet over DWDM“) without intermediate SDH/SONET mapping
simplifies management
• Line interface with FEC, client interface w/o FEC
• support of jumbo frames of any size
For internal use
Fig. 67 Example of mapping Schemes of Client Signals to OTU-1 Optical Channel
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
73
Hardware & Functionality
2.5.1.2
I01T10G-1 card
The 10G transponder functionality is realized by the I01T10G/LHD/LH/Regio/
Regio80/Metro cards. Each I01T10G-1 card generates and terminates an optical
channel of a wavelength appropriate for DWDM transmission. The exact wavelength
is controlled via a tunable transmit laser, (only available in the I01T10G-1 LH(S) and
I01T10G-1 LHD card). The S-FEC feature allows longer span distances.
The I01T10G-1 LH card is equipped with a Mach Zehnder Modulator (MZM),
temperature-controlled and wavelength tunable laser, with wavelength accuracy
suitable for 50 GHz and 100 GHz DWDM channel spacing.
The I01T10G-1 LHD card can handle a higher dispersion and a higher PMD load, by
using a Maximum Likelihood Sequence Estimator (MSLE).
The optical 10 Gbit/s client interfaces of the I01T10G-1 Regio/LH(S)/LHD card are
equipped with one hot-pluggable 10 Gigabit Small Form Factor Pluggable (XFP)
module mounted on the front panel of the card. The XFP module, like the SFP,
performs the optical/ electrical conversion in both signal directions.
The card can also be used as a 3R-regenerator by back-to-back configuration of two
I01T10G via the OTU-2 clients.
The I01T10G-1 transponder implements a standard compliant mapping scheme for
STM64/OC192 signals into an OTU-2V optical channel acc. acc. ITU-T G.806 and
G.709.
Since a standard 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10GE) LAN signal does not fit into the
transport capacity of a standard OPU2 payload, the OPU2 transport capacity is
increased using also OPU2 stuffing bytes for payload mapping and slightly increasing
the OPU2/OTU2 data rate; by this means the 10GE LAN signal can be transparently
transmitted at wire speed over the optical transport network. Fault supervision and
performance monitoring are possible at OCh and Ethernet layers for monitoring
10GE traffic in both ingress and egress directions.
The SUPER-FEC scheme in combination with dispersion tolerant optical receiver
provides an excellent dispersion tolerance for regional and long haul applications.
74
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

I01T10G OTU2 Transponder Card
I01T10G
Client interfaces
1 x OTU-2
or
1 x STM-64/OC-192
1 x 10 GE LAN PHY
XFP
or
Line
MSA
OTU-2 Framer
and Mapper
(LH and
Regio)
or
Line interface
1 x OTU-2(V)
1 x 10 GE WAN PHY
10 Gb/s Transponder with full OTU-2 support
Super-FEC on line side with 8 dB coding gain
Multiple services supported service assignment for client ports
– STM-64 / OC-192
– Fully transparent 10 Gigabit Ethernet
– OTU-2
One board type can be equipped for Long Haul (full C Band tunable laser), Regio
and Metro (fixed laser) applications
CD-tolerant version (for special fiber types) with +- 1500ps/nm @ 2dB penalty
For internal use
Fig. 68 10G Transponder Card I01T10G
I01T10G OTU2 Transponder Card
Mapping of client signals
Client IF
Line IF
OPU2
ODU2
OTU2(V)
Standard FEC
(SUPER-FEC)
OChr
10.709225 Gb/s
(11.00320 Gb/s)
OPU2
OPU1e
mapping
ODU2
OTU2(V)
Standard FEC
(SUPER-FEC)
OChn
11.049107 Gb/s,
(11.352416 Gb/s)
OTU2
OPU2e
mapping
ODU2
OTU2(V)
Standard FEC
(SUPER-FEC)
OChn
11.095728 Gb/s
(11.400316 Gb/s,
only on LHD)
OTU2
Std. FEC
ODU2
OTU2(V)
Standard FEC
(SUPER-FEC)
OChn
OTU2V
11.049107 Gb/s
10GE LAN w/
OPU1e mapping
OTU2V
Std. FEC
ODU2
OTU2(V)
Standard FEC
(SUPER-FEC)
OChn
OTU2V
11.0957278 Gb/s
10GE LAN PHY w/
OPU2e mapping
OTU2V
Std. FEC
ODU2
OTU2(V)
Standard FEC
(SUPER-FEC)
OChn
STM64 / OC192 / asyn.
10GbE WAN
9.953280 Gb/s
10GbE LAN
syn.
10.3125 Gb/s
10GbE LAN
10.3125 Gb/s
OTU2
10.7092253 Gb/s
•
•
•
•
•
•
syn.
10.709225 Gb/s
(11.00320 Gb/s)
11.049107 Gb/s
(11.352416 Gb/s)
11.095728 Gb/s
(11.400316 Gb/s,
only on LHD)
Standard FEC or Super FEC configurable for the Line IF
(b) (e) OPU1e mapping mode acc. G.Sup43, utilizing OPU2 stuffing bytes and increased OTU2 data rate
(c) (f) OPU2e mapping mode, not utilizing OPU2 stuffing bytes but increased OTU2 data rate
(d) (e) (f) Client side Std. FEC support direct client side interconnect to WDM system
(d) (e) (f) client side GCC0 support in-line management of connected remote NT
support of jumbo frames of any size
For internal use
Fig. 69 Mapping of 10G Transponder Card I01T10G
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
75
Hardware & Functionality
2.5.1.3
I08T10G-1 Card
The 10G muxponder functionality is realized by the I08T10G/
LHD/LH/Regio/Regio80/Metro cards.
The card provides the following traffic interfaces:
• 1 DWDM line port with tunable wavelength long haul interface for I08T10G/LH and
I08T10G/LHD, where LHD refers to a specific card variant with high dispersion
tolerance and S stands for see cable application, or fixed wavelength regional
interface for I08T10G/Regio card type;
• 8 pluggable (SFP modules) client port for the following client interface types:
4x STM-16/OC-48, or
8x GE (1000Base-X/T), or
4x OTU-1 (w/o FEC).
TIP
Also mixed client interfaces are possible, different client interfaces can be chosen per
individual ODU1 data unit within the aggregate ODU2 data.
The client traffic ports are realized as hot pluggable SFP module which can be
equipped depending on the specific traffic demands for this card, thus providing
lowest CAPEX by a single card type for many different applications. For optical client
ports, both uncolored and CWDM interfaces are supported.
The SUPER-FEC scheme in combination with dispersion tolerant optical receiver
provides an excellent dispersion tolerance for regional and long haul applications.
The I08T10G-1 transponder implements a standard compliant mapping scheme of all
client signals into an OTU-2V optical channel acc. acc. ITU-T G.806 and G.709.
In case of Gigabit Ethernet (GE) client signals, 2 client signals are mapped into the
OPU1 payload of an ODU1 data unit via GFP-T generic framing procedure and GFPT frame multiplexing acc. ITU-T G.7041. This provides a fully transparent
transmission of GE services at wire speed over the optical transport network and at
the same time achieves efficient bandwidth utilization of the OTU1 optical channel.
Mapping via GFP-T avoids any intermediate mapping into SDH/SONET layers and
thus simplifies management of GE services. Fault supervision and performance
monitoring are possible at OCh, STM16/OC48 and Ethernet layers for monitoring
client traffic in both ingress and egress directions.
In case of an STM-16/OC-48 SDH/SONET client signal, one such client signal is
mapped into an OPU1 payload of an ODU1 data unit acc. ITU-T G.709.
In case of an OTU-1 client signal (IrDI), the ODU1 optical data unit is transparently
passed between client and aggregate line interface for providing a transparent optical
channel including payload and ODU1 overhead.
76
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

I08T10G Muxponder card with 10G Line
I08T10G
(DWDM) SFP
(DWDM) SFP
Client interfaces
Line interfaces
(DWDM) SFP
4 x OTU-1or
(DWDM) SFP
4 x STM-16/OC-48 or
8 x GE
(DWDM) SFP
Line
MSA
OTU-2 Framer
and Mapper
1 x OTU-2
(fixed or
tunable)
(DWDM) SFP
(DWDM) SFP
(DWDM) SFP
• 10G muxponder with full ODU-2 support
• 8 SFP grey/C/DWDM clients:
• 4x STM-16/OC-48, or
• 8x GE (1000Base-X/T), or
• 4x OTU-1 (w/o FEC)
• Super-FEC on line side with 8 dB coding gain
• One board type can be equipped for Long Haul (full C Band tunable laser), Regio and Metro
(fixed laser) applications
• CD-tolerant version (for special fiber types) with +- 1500ps/nm @ 2dB penalty
For internal use
Fig. 70 10G Muxponder Card I08T10G
I08T10G Muxponder card with 10G Line
Mapping of client signals
Client IF
STM-16/OC-48
2.488320 Gb/s
STM16CBR
asyn.
OPU1
ODU1
asyn.
ODTU12
Kx
Line IF
OTU1
(w/o
FEC)
OTU1
2.6660514 Gb/s
GbE
1.25 Gb/s
asyn.
ODTU12
Lx
GFP-T
GFP asyn.
OPU1
MX/DX
GbE
1.25 Gb/s
ODU1
ODU1
GFP-T
asyn.
ODTU12
Mx
ODTUG2
OPU2
ODU2
OTU2V
OChr
10.709225 Gb/s
w/ Std. FEC
11.00320 Gb/s
w/ Super FEC
K+L+M ≤ 4
• Standard FEC or Super FEC configurable for the Line IF
• (b) OTU1 framed client format fully compatible with I04T2G5 OTU1 signal (direct interconnect
supported)
• (b) client side GCC0 support in-line management of connected remote NT
• (c) GFP-T framing for wire speed transmission of GE clients
• (c) GE clients are directly mapped into OTU („Ethernet over DWDM“) without intermediate
SDH/SONET mapping to simplify management
For internal use
Fig. 71 Mapping of 10G Muxponder Card I08T10G
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
77
Hardware & Functionality
78
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

Transponder Cards
For internal use
Fig. 72 Transponder HW layout
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
79
Hardware & Functionality
2.5.1.4
I05AD10G-1 Card
With the release R4.2x, SURPASS hiT 7300 supports a new type of multiplexing
transponder card which allows an easy and efficient implementation of multi-service
aggregation and distribution networks for various lower rate data services, which is
required in typical backhaul applications within mobile networks and DSL provider
networks. The I05AD10G card performs time division multiplexing of different client
data services in combination with add/drop functionality into colored 10G optical
channel signals for direct transmission over metro and regional DWDM networks.
This 1-slot card has a total capacity of 9xGE or 2x 4G FC per OTU-2 channel. See
following Figure for a simplified block diagram of this card. The card is also referred
to as ‘ADM on a blade’.
Line Interfaces:
2 pluggable (XFP modules) DWDM line ports for interface type:
• 2x OTU-2 (w/ standard FEC);
available as Regio or Metro type depending on optical reach requirements. For
special applications, also grey (non-colored) C/DWDM XFPs can be equipped. At the
network (line) side the card offers access for 1 or 2 optical DWDM channels with
OTU-2 standard data rate (10.7 Gb/s) and FEC acc. ITU-T G.709. The required
wavelength is realized by plugging the correct DWDM XFP module, which is verified
by the NE’s controller function. The 2 OTU-2 line interfaces can also be configured
for optical channel protection (OChP, see Chapter 4) with respect to the individual
multiplexed client services. In R4.30, the O02CSP-1 can be used for line side
protection.
Client Interfaces:
5 pluggable (SFP modules) client ports for the following client interface types
individually:
•
•
•
•
up to 5x GE (1000Base-X/-T), or
up to 4x FC/FICON 4G
STM-1/OC3, STM4/OC12 or STM16/OC48 (new in 4.30)
Anyrate muxponder / ADM (100 Mbit/s – 3.4 Gbit/s, free mix with other clients),
new in 4.30
Also mixed client interface (e.g. 1x FC-4G +4x GE; 2x FC4G + 3x GE, 3x FC-4G + 2x
GE) are possible.
All traffic ports are realized as hot pluggable SFP/XFP modules which can be
equipped depending on the specific traffic demands for this card, thus providing
lowest CAPEX by a single card type for many different applications.
80
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

I05AD10G Multi-service Add-drop Multiplexer (ADM)
2 line interfaces
(DWDM) SFP
Client interfaces:
GE,
STM-1/OC-3*,
STM-4/OC-12*,
FC-4G,
STM-16/OC-48*,
anyrate*
DWDM
XFP
(DWDM) SFP
(DWDM) SFP
OTU-2
GFP-T Mapper
Add/Drop Switch
(DWDM) SFP
DWDM
XFP
(DWDM) SFP
OTU-2
• Add/Drop Multiplexer (ADM) with dual Muxponder application
• grey/C/DWDM XFP based line ports
• grey/C/DWDM SFP based client ports for the following client interface types
• up to 5x GE (1000Base-X/-T), STM-1/OC-3*, STM-4/OC-12*,
• up to 4x FC-4G / FICON 4G, STM-16/OC-48*
• mixed client interfaces
• Anyrate clients (100 Mbit/s – 3.4 Gbit/s, free mix with other clients)*
• Direct optical connection of I05AD10G to I01T10G, I04TQ10G and I04T40G
• 1 slot card, Total capacity per OTU-2: 9xGE or 2x 4G FC
• GFP Channel Protection via second line port
• Drop & Continue / Broadcast Function
* Rel.4.3
For internal use
Fig. 73 10G Multiservice Add-drop Multiplexer Card I05AD10G
I05AD10G Multi-service Add-drop Multiplexer (ADM)
(a)
Client IF
GbE
1.25 Gb/s
Line IF
GFP-T
GFP asyn.
OPU2
MX/DX
FC-4G/FICON-4G
4.25 Gb/s
ODU2
OTU2
OChr
10.709225 Gb/s
w/ Std. FEC
GFP-T
• Standard FEC on the OTU2 line IF
• GFP-T framing for wire speed transmission of GE clients (L2 functionality handled
by I22CE10G)
• GE clients are directly mapped into OTU („Ethernet over DWDM“) without
intermediate SDH/SONET mapping to simplify management
Fig. 74 Mapping of 10G Multiservice Add-drop card I05AD10G
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
81
Hardware & Functionality
2.5.1.5
I04TQ10G-1 Card
The I04TQ10G-1 offers in a high degree of flexibility in 10G planning by supporting
various application scenarios. The module can be operated as a quad transponder
with 4 independent transponders and many different clients, the following
configurations are possible:
• 4x independent transponders with any mix of clients
• 2x transponders with channel protection
General properties:
• Up to 8 interfaces total, 4 line and 4 client interfaces, operated with 6 XFPs and 2
SFP+
•
•
•
•
Up to 2 client XFPs configurable for line side, SFP+ for client only
Pluggable modules supported (XFP for line, SFP+ for client)
1 slot card width, either in standard or flatpack shelf
Interface can be sub-equipped
Line side functionality:
Reach up to 1000km can be achieved with pluggable XFPs for Regio (fixed or
tuneable wavelengths) and ULH (future). 40 or 80 channel capacity can be achieved.
The OTU2V interface with 10% overhead for SFEC is available or the OTU2 interface
with standard FEC. Also, support of GCC0 for management purposes.
Client side functionality:
•
•
•
•
•
•
82
10 GE LAN PHY – GFP-F mapping
10 GE LAN PHY – Semi-transparent GFP-F (AMCC) mapping
STM-64/OC-192/10GE WAN PHY
OTU2 with standard FEC, GCC0, TCM
FC 8G (8.5GBit/s), for SFP+ only
FC 10G (10.51875 GBit/s)
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

I04TQ10G: Quadruple 10G transponder
1-slot card
4 client interfaces
XFP
- STM-64, OC-192
- 10 GE WAN PHY
- 10 GE LAN PHY
- OTU2
- FC 8G, 10G
XFP
GFP-T Mapper
OTU-2
OTU-2
DWDM
XFP
DWDM
XFP
SFP+
SFP+
•
•
•
•
•
•
4 line interfaces
DWDM
XFP
DWDM
XFP
OTU-2
OTU-2
Line side with fixed or tunable WDM XFP (40ch / 80ch option)
Approximately 1000 km reach
Power consumption of < 20 Watt per 10G service
80 wavelength terminal in 2 shelves
Double regenerator functionality (client XFPs as line XFPs for this mode)
Prepared for internal channel protection (>4.30)
For internal use
Fig. 75 10G Muxponder Card I04TQ10G
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
83
Hardware & Functionality
2.5.1.6
I22CE10G-1 Card
The I22CE10G provides a very compact carrier Ethernet switch device, fully
integrated within the hiT7300 DWDM platform for Packet Optical Transport. Starting
from R 4.30, this I22CE10G traffic card is used for Carrier Ethernet Switch types and
provides L2 functions, services and interfaces. Extended switching capacity can be
achieved by stacking the card.
General benefits:
• The use in hiT7300 enables integrated CE over WDM
• Saving floor space, no extra rack and equipment is required
• Handling of DWDM and carrier Ethernet switch functionality with one single
network management system for simplified operation and trouble shooting
This interface card offers 22 Carrier Ethernet (CE) ports. Four of the 10 GbE ports
can be configured as DWDM ports (OTU2) with 10G transmission. The Ethernet
switching capacity is 76G (California count 152G).It offers enhanced L2 processing
for 1GE and 10GbE client services. Note that in hiT7300 the usage of carrier
Ethernet transport (CET) is also possible with the existing transponders and
muxponder cards but only the I22CE10G supports the statistical multiplex gain
through switching of multiple Ethernet ports to and from OTN interfaces. The T-level
slide sets contain more examples on the various applications for the L2 card,
including switch stacking, service aggregation.
Line interfaces:
• 4x hybrid (grey/tunable) DWDM XFP based line ports
• 10GE over OTU-2 with Standard FEC, or 10GE interface configurable
• 1010GE mapping into OTU-2 acc. G.709, standard G.709 FEC or Super-FEC for
enhanced reach
• Line interfaces also configurable as client interfaces
Client interfaces:
Client module: Several client interfaces (SFP for 1GbE, SFP+ for 10GbE), 10GbE
PHY for 10GbE interfaces, Client CPLD for SFP/SFP+, LED handling
• up to 22 client ports possible in flexible configuration
• 16x 1GE and 2x 10GE client interfaces (up to 4 additional 10GE can be configured
from line ports)
• Any port usable as UNI or NNI
84
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

Metro CET Ethernet switch I22CE10G
DWDM SFP
…
…
Client interface:
16 x GE and
2 x 10GE (+
hybrid IFs)
16x
DWDM SFP
SFP+
…
4 line interfaces
DWDM
XFP
2x
DWDM
XFP
OTU-2
DWDM
XFP
10GE
or
(opt. configurable
DWDM
XFP
SFP+
as client IF)
76G Ethernet switch capacity (California Count 152G)
Card protection option and ext. switching capacity via stacking of L2 cards
4x hybrid OTU-2 / 10GE interfaces (configurable trunk or client)
16x 1GE and 2x 10GE client interfaces, statistical multiplex
Line interfaces are 10GE mapped into OTU-2 with (Super)-FEC
Support for connection oriented Ethernet
 Extended VLAN support
 L2 MPLS support (R4.4)
 E-LINE and E-LAN services acc. MEF-6
 2 slot card






For internal use
Fig. 76 L2 Switch card I22CE10G
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
85
Hardware & Functionality
2.5.1.7
I0xT40G Card
With release R4.25 SURPASS hiT 7300 supports the new 40G transponder cards
•
•
•
•
I01T40G  40Gbit/s on client interface
I04T40G  4x 10Gbit/s on client interface
I01R40G  40Gbit/s unidirectional regenerator card
I02R40G-2/CQP  40Gbit/s bidirectional regenerator card for CP-QPSK
From these cards there are different sub types:
•
•
•
•
•
I0xT40G-1/DP  DPSK modulation
I0xT40G-1/DPS  DPSK modulation for sea cable
I0xT40G-1/CQP  CP-QPSK modulation
I01T40G-2/CQP-I  CP-QPSK modulation with intra office (2km) client interface
I01T40G-2/CQPS-I  CP-QPSK modulation for sea cable with intra office (2km)
client interface
• I01T40G-2/CQP-S   CP-QPSK modulation with short reach (10km) client
interface
• I01T40G-2/CQPS-I  CP-QPSK modulation for sea cable with short reach (10km)
client interface
The 40G cards which are fully integrated within the hiT 7300 mechanical shelf and
rack solution and which is fully managed by the hiT 7300 NE controller. In R4.30, line
protection with the new O02CSP-1 card is introduced.
These cards use on the line interface OTU3v with Super-FEC.
The I01T40G card provides the following traffic interfaces:
• 1x STM-258/OC-768, or
• 1x OTU-3 (w/ standard FEC insertion)
The I04T40G card provides the following traffic interface:
•
•
•
•
86
4x STM-64/OC-192, or
4x 10GE (10GBASE-R/-W, GBE LAN semitransparent), or
4x OTU-2 (w/ standard FEC insertion)
Arbitrary mix of service types on client
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

I01T40G-1
40G Transponder Card
Fully integrated card
I01T40G-1
Client interfaces
1 x OTU-3 or
1 x STM-256/OC-768
•
•
•
•
•
•
XFP
OTU-3 Framer
and Mapper
Line
MSA
(DPSK)
Line interface
1 x OTU-3
TDCM
40 Gb/s Transponder with OTU-3 support
Adaptive DPSK modulation format, full C band tunable laser
Integrated dispersion compensation unit and pre-amplifier
Optional external polarization mode dispersion (PMD) compensator
Super Forward Error Correction (Super-FEC) on line side, appr. 8dB coding gain
Services supported
•STM-256 / OC-768
•OTU-3
Fig. 77 40G Transponder Card I01T40G
I04T40G-1
40G Muxponder Card
Client interfaces
4 x STM-64/OC-192 or
4 x OTU-2 or
4 x 10GE or
any mix
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Fully integrated card
I04T40G-1
(DWDM) XFP
(DWDM) XFP
(DWDM) XFP
OTU-3
Framer
and Mapper
Line
MSA
(DPSK)
Line interface
1 x OTU-3
TDCM
(DWDM) XFP
40 Gb/s Transponder with OTU-3 support
Adaptive DPSK modulation format, full C band tunable laser
Integrated dispersion compensation unit and pre-amplifier
Optional external polarization mode dispersion (PMD) compensator
Super Forward Error Correction (Super-FEC) on line side with 7% overhead
4 x grey/C/DWDM XFP based client ports:
4x STM-64/OC-192 or
•4x 10 GbE LAN or 10GbE WAN or
•4x OTU-2 (with FEC )
•or mixed configuration
For internal use
Fig. 78 40G Muxponder Card I04T40G
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
87
Hardware & Functionality
I0xR40G-1
40G Regenerator Card
Fully integrated card
I0xR40G-1
OTU-3 Framer
and Mapper
Line interface
Line
MSA
(DPSK)
1 x OTU-3
TDCM
• I01R40G-1 is a unidirectional regenerator card
• I02R40G-2/CQP is a bidirectional regenerator card for CP-QPSK
• 40 Gbit/sec unidirectional regenerator function via OTU-3 line interface (DPSK
modulation format)
• Bidirectional regenerator function provided via 2 cards in adjacent slots
Fig. 79 40G Regenerator Card I0xR40G
Fig. 80 40G Muxponder Card I04T40G
88
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality
2.6

hiT7300 Optical Protection
hiT7300 supports the following traffic protection options:
Protection options
Protection on UNI client ,
node disjoint DWDM routing by TransNet
1+1 Optical path protection
O02CSP/ O03CP +
any transponder
inter card
1+1 Optical path protection,
I04T2G5
I04TQ10G
Cost
intra card
1+1 Service Channel protection
intra card
I05AD10G
O02CSP +
any transponder
1+1 optical channel protection
1+1 OMS protection
O02CSP + opt. filters
(future release)
O02CSP +
any amplifier
1+1 span protection
Network availability
Various protection levels offer
optimized CAPEX for each required availability level
For internal use
Fig. 81 hiT7300 Protection options
These options are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
1+1 Line protection without transponder protection
1+1 Service Channel protection without transponder protection
1+1 Optical Channel protection without transponder protection
1+1 Optical Channel protection with transponder protection
1+1 OMS protection
1+1 span protection
In order to achieve reasonable traffic survivability, working and protection paths of the
OCh should be routed over physically diverse optical multiplex sections, which
means that the necessary optical equipment (opt. multiplexer/de-multiplexer, opt.
Amplifier) must be doubled.
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
89
Hardware & Functionality
1+1 Line protection without transponder
protection
Transponder
side splitter, receive side switch
O02CSP
Transponder
Characteristics
• Protects the transponder line signal
• O02CSP protection card with transmit
Optical
Protection
Switch
Protects against
 Fibre cut, degradation on the optical line
 Protection against any failure of the optical system (filters, ROADM, amplifiers)
 Does not protect against any transponder failures
Lowest cost protection; best used for 40G transponder protection to
avoid doubling expensive 40G transponders
Fig. 82 hiT7300 Protection options
1+1 Service Channel protection without
transponder protection
Characteristics
 Protection of the transponder’s
optical client side, i.e. each individual
client signal can be protected by one
electrical protection switch
 Dual line side of transponder card
I05AD10G is used as working and
protection line sides
 No dedicated protection card
necessary
I05AD10G
Client 1
Client
processing
Mux/
Demux
Client 2
Client
processing
Mux/
Demux
Muxponder card
Protects against
 Fibre cut, degradation on the optical line
 Equipment failures of all cards in the optical system (filters, ROADM, amplifiers)
and of the transponder line interface (line side XFP)
Ideal for transport of GE services;
can be combined with drop & continue for multicast
For internal use
Fig. 83 hiT7300 Protection options
90
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

1+1 Optical Channel protection without
transponder protection
Characteristics
 Protection of the transponder’s
optical line side, i.e. the complete
transponder line signal is protected
by one electrical protection switch
 Dual line side of transponder card
I04T2G5 is used as working and
protection line sides
 No dedicated protection card
necessary
I04T2G5
Line
processing
Client 1
Mux/
Demux
Client 2
Line
processing
Muxponder card
Protects against
 Fibre cut, degradation on the optical line
 Equipment failures of all cards in the optical system (filters, ROADM, amplifiers)
and of the transponder line interface (line side SFP)
Ideal for transport of GE services
Fig. 84 hiT7300 Protection options
1+1 Optical Channel protection with transponder
protection
Transponder
O03CP
Transponder
Characteristics
• Protection on client side of the transponder
• For all 10/40G transponder cards
• One O03CP card protects up to 3 bi-directional
signals
Transponder
Transponder
Optical
Protection
Switch
Protects against
• Fibre cut, degradation on the optical line
• Full transponder protection, and protection against any failure of the optical
system (filters, ROADM, amplifiers)
Ideal for protection of highest value leased lines
Fig. 85 hiT7300 Protection options
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
91
Hardware & Functionality
2.6.1
O02CSP-1, Dual protection card
Protection and compensator cards for OCh protection schemes are complemented in
R4.30 by a dual protection card which contains two 2x1 switches and two power
splitters. The O02CSP-1 in cooperation with one interface card will perform a 1+1
Line Side Optical Channel Protection (LS-OChP). The switching will be done actively
by the O02CSP-1 card using an optical switch. In contrast, the O03CP is a purely
passive card.
This is a 1-slot wide active card for two bidirectional 2-port channel protection units,
each consisting of a splitter and a switch. All the inputs and the output of the switch
are supervised by LOS monitors. The card is usable for line protection via the splitter
and the switch. Within the actual version, the switch decision could be triggered by
both; the operator via CCEP or autonomously via LOS detection. All LOS evaluation
for the O02CSP is based on its own decisions. No communication is available
between O02CSP and any other transponder card in 4.30. Hence, the O02CSP can
handle any transponder. In addition to line side protection, the O02CSP-1 can also
be used on the client side of a muxponder, as loss forwarding will be supported in
4.30. The protection has to be configured via LCT
92
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

O02CSP-1
O02CSP-1 Dual
Dual Protection
Protection Card
Card
Fig. 86 O02CSP-1, Dual protection card
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
93
Hardware & Functionality
2.6.2
O03CP-1, Optical channel protection card
A 1+1 ODU1 protection (ODU1P trail protection) is completely realized on the 2G5
transponder card I04T2G5 1 for a corresponding pair of working/protection OTU1 line
interfaces on one transponder card. Protection switching is done on the electrical
signal level for the ODU1 signal transmitted/received at the line side.
A 1+1 client protection of OTU2 Channels is realized by a pair of 10G muxponder
cards I08T10G 1 or/and. transponder cards I01T10G 1 equipped in adjacent slots
together with optical protection cards O03CP 1. Protection switching is done by on/off
switching of the client laser at the transponder card. Only the client laser of the active
path is enabled, the client laser of the protecting path is switched off. This requires
communication between the two transponder cards. The active and the protecting
path are combined at the O03CP 1 card.
As an example for the possible slot assignment of the muxponder/transponder cards
see the following table:
Slot N.
1
2
1+1 client
I08T10G-1
1+1 client
I01T10G-1
3
4
W
W
P
5
P
W
6
7
8
W
P
W
P
9
P
W
10
11
W
P
W
P
12
13
14
P
W
P
15
P
W
The OChP card O03CP-1 is a passive card which contains 6 optical splitters. Three
act as combiners to switch the traffic together with the 10 Gbit/s transponder cards.
The remaining three are used for bridging the traffic for protection.
Up to three protection groups can be created and managed by the O03CP-1 card
(i.e., three pairs of 10 Gbit/s transponder cards).
The O03CP 1 is a passive card.
The following table is giving the OChP card overview:
94
Card name
Number of
protected channels
O03CP-1
3
Architecture
3 splitters and 3
combiners
Communication
type
bidirectional
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
16
Combiner
Protection 3
OUT
3 dB Splitter
Working 3
OUT
Protection 3
IN
Working 3
IN
Protection 2
OUT
3 dB Splitter
Working 2
OUT
Protection 2
IN
Working 2
IN
Working 1
OUT
Combiner
Combiner
3 dB Splitter
Protection 1
OUT

Protection 1
IN
Working 1
IN
Hardware & Functionality
O03CP-1
Client
1 IN
Client
1 OUT
Client
2 IN
Client
2 OUT
Client
3 IN
Client
3 OUT
Fig. 87 O03CP-1, Optical channel protection card
Fig. 88 Possible slot assignment for transponder cards working as a protection pairs
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
95
Hardware & Functionality
2.7
2.7.1
System management Function
Optical Supervisory Channel
SURPASS hiT7300 offers a 12.5 Mbit/s (≤ 4.30) or 150 Mbit/s (≥ 5.0) bandwidth
Optical Supervisory Channel (OSC) to provide communications between all
SURPASS hiT7300 NE's within OMS and OTS trails.
The optical supervisory channel is used for all data communication as needed for the
configuration, fault management, performance management, as well as for any
software management required to setup and maintain the NE's of the OTN.
The OSC is a bidirectional data channel whereby the same wavelength of 1510 nm is
used for both transmission directions, each on a separate fiber. The OSC wavelength
lies just outside the C-Band of the used optical channel wavelengths, and is
terminated at each hiT7300 network element (ONN and OLR). Therefore, even in the
rare occurrence of an optical amplifier failure, the OSC and hence all management
communications remain intact.
The high optical performance of the OSC supports very long spans for up to 50 dB
span attenuation at 1510 nm out-of-band OSC wavelength (corresponds to ~48.5 dB
span attenuation for traffic wavelengths within C-Band) using LALBCH-1 booster
amplifier card.
TIP
Since the version 5.0 the resilience of the OSC channel will be also improved by the
FEC mechanism known from the transponder cards
The following table shows an overview of the functions supported by the OSC:
Optical Supervisory Channel (OSC) Functions:
Data communication channel for the internal Data Communications Network DCN
(Ethernet based);
Link control information for initializing and maintaining of the optical OMS/OTS trails
(e.g. number of equipped channels, current link states, etc.);
Control Information for Automatic Power Shutdown (APSD);
Two bidirectional User Channels (Ethernet based);
Two Engineering Orderwire (EOW) channels;
Trace Identifier for the optical OMS/OTS trail;
Forward / Backward Defect Indication (FDI / BDI) within OMS/OTS.
96
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

TNMS
LCT
Q (LAN) Interface
NE
NE
Controller
Controller
QF Interface
OSC
(1510nm)
ONN
NE
NE
Controller
Controller
OLR
OSC
(1510nm)
NE
NE
Controller
Controller
ONN
OSC
(1510nm)
NE
NE
Controller
Controller
ONN
Fig. 89 Optical Supervisory Channel
Fig. 90 Optical Supervisory Channel (OSC) Functions
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
97
Hardware & Functionality
2.7.2
Generic Communication Channels
The SURPASS hiT 7300 supports Generic Communication Channels of GCC0 type
according to ITU-T G.709 for OTU-k interfaces of the SURPASS hiT 7300
transponder cards. The GCC0 channels can be used to extend the internal DCN of a
transport network or for transmission of user channels in any customer specific
application.
The GCC0 channels can be preferably used for data communication over passive
CWDM/DWDM links or non-colored (grey) single channels, where no OSC channel
exists for these purposes.
Bandwidth of GCC0:
• OTU1  GCC0 326 kbit/s
• OTU2  GCC0 1.3 Mbit/s
• OTU3  GCC0 5.2 Mbit/s
A maximum of 1 GCC0 channels (OTU-2) and 4 GCC0 channels (OTU-1) are
supported per transponder card. All the configured channels must belong either to
the client(s) or the line(s) interface of the card.
A maximum of 26 GCC0 channels are supported per NE.
In the GCC0 channel two types of communication protocols are supported, which are
configurable per NE:
• SURPASS hiT 7300 GCC0 mode: a GCC0 channel transports one internal DCN
channel (as part of the SURPASS hiT 7300 internal DCN) and two user channels,
all consisting of tagged Ethernet frames.
• SURPASS hiT 7500 GCC0 mode: a GCC0 channel transports one internal DCN
channel for communication within a SURPASS hiT 7500 internal DCN, using an IP
over PPP protocol stack compatible with SURPASS hiT 7500; this mode can be
used for applications using a SURPASS hiT 7300 SON NE (as a remote network
termination) with SURPASS hiT 7300 transponder cards as a feeder for a
SURPASS hiT 7500 transmission network.
TIP
Each GCC0 channel supports two transparent Ethernet based user channels (in
SURPASS hiT 7300 mode), which can be externally accessed by two RJ45
connectors on the controller card within the shelf containing the respective
transponder card terminating the GCC0 channel.
98
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

hiT
hiT 7300
7300 GCC
GCC (Generic
(Generic Communication
Communication Channel
Channel Facts
Facts
● Generic Communication Channels of GCC0 type according to ITU-T G.709
● GCC0 channels can be preferably used for data communication over
passive CWDM/DWDM links
● Each GCC0 channel offers a bandwidth of 326 Kbit/s in OTU1 transponders
(e.g., I04T2G5-1) and 1.3 Mbit/s in OTU2 transponders (e.g., I01T10G-1).
● A maximum of 1 GCC0 channels (OTU-2) and 4 GCC0 channels (OTU-1)
are supported per transponder card
● All the configured channels must belong either to the client(s) or
the line(s) interface of the card
● A maximum of 26 GCC0 channels are supported per NE
Fig. 91
TNMS
LCT
Q (LAN) Interface
QF Interface
NE
NE
Controller
Controller
OCU
OCU
OCU
OCU
OCU
OCU
SON
Optical
Line
NE
NE
Controller
Controller
OCU
OCU
OCU
OCU
OCU
OCU
SON
Optical
Line
NE
NE
Controller
Controller
OCU
OCU
OCU
OCU
OCU
OCU
SON
Fig. 92 Example of usage Generic Communication Channels
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
99
Hardware & Functionality
2.7.3
Control and management Function
Optical link control is intended to ensure optimized optical link operation in any link
state. The goals are to maintain sufficient link performance and consequently an
equally distributed power level (with reference to the containing OSNR value) at each
channel's tail end (at optical receiver or regenerator locations). Within each individual
NE, the Controller card serves as central instance to manage and control all optical
link relevant information. Controller cards within an optical link must exchange
management information as well as measurement data between each other.
Two different types of link control are available since version 5.0:
• EPC: Enhanced Power Control this is the legacy behavior of the hiT7300.
• APC: Advanced Power Control is the behavior of the hiT7300 DCM free network
(96 channels). The advantages are faster measurement cycles more automatic
features.
TIP
Link management information and measurement data needed for controlling the
optical link is exchanged between NE's via the optical supervisory channel.
NE external communication links and NE internal communication links are
established to properly operate all optical link control mechanisms for the whole link
and within the NE.
Within each shelf the Controller card communicates, with all "passive" cards (e.g.,
filter and attenuator cards), using the I2C bus. "Active" cards (e.g., line amplifier and
Raman pump cards) use the amplifier-pump control bus to communicate with the
Controller card.
The communication between shelves is achieved with two Ethernet LAN connectors
on the Controller card.
100
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

ONN-T
OLR
Controller
Card
ONN-S
Controller
Card
ONN-T
Controller
Card
Controller
Card
OSC
OSC
OSC
OSC
OSC
OSC
Optical Link A
Optical Link B
Fig. 93 Optical link control
I²C bus
hiT7300 NE
Shelf
Controller
...
14 15 16
filter card
Card Slots
filter card
3
amplifier
2
attenuator
card
filter card
1
Shelf
I²C bus
Main
Controller
...
14 15 16
filter card
Card Slots
filter card
3
amplifier
2
Raman
amplifier
Raman
amplifier
1
NE internal Ethernet
Amplifier-Pump Control bus
Amplifier-Pump Control bus
Master Shelf
Fig. 94 NE internal communication
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
101
Hardware & Functionality
2.7.4
Data Communication Network
The Data Communication Network (DCN) provides TMN access, via Ethernet
interfaces Q and QF using SNMPv3, TL1 and HTTP protocols, to all the NE's within
one sub-network. The Q interface allows the SURPASS hiT7300 system to be
connected to a TMN system, e.g., TNMS. The QF interface has a pre-configured IP
address for a direct local connection to the LCT. The LCT obtains its IP address from
a DHCP / DNS server on the NE. In addition to the Ethernet interfaces of the NE's,
the underlying DCN provides interconnected Data Communication Channels (DCC)
to operate all connected NE's.
The services provided by the DCN are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Separate the DCN from the customer IP network via NAT-P.
Software download/distribution via FTP.
Pre-emphasis and file distribution control based on XML-RPC.
User channels with point-to-point Ethernet channel per link.
Time synchronization via Network Time Protocol (NTP).
Domain Name Service (DNS).
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP).
The following management protocols are provided by the hiT7300 NE:
SNMP V3
Protocol between NE's and TNMS Core/ TNMS CT/ @CT is used as a
direct interface to customer OS
HTTP.1
Used by Web-based LCT - called @CT - and offers a fully functional
Element Manager for commissioning or maintenance of a NE.
FTP(S)
Used for file transfer (e.g. PM/alarm data, SW download and etc.)
TL1
Used for Network management acc. Telcordia standards.
2.7.4.1
Gateway Function (GF) of NE
The Gateway Function (GF) provides one single IP address for a sub-network and is
the connection point between NE and a network management system. The GF then
maps different TCP ports to different NE's with internal IP addresses in this subnetwork; implements a Network Address Translation Port forwarding (NAT-P) to hide
the DCN internal IP addresses from the carrier data network and a FTP proxy for file
transfer between an external FTP server and the NE's. The GF separates the
embedded DCN from the customer DCN.
At least two Gateway Functions (GF) should be implemented on different NE's which
provides redundant access to the SURPASS hiT7300 DCN.
102
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

The services provided by the DCN are:
● Separate the DCN from the customer IP network via NAT-P.
● Software download/distribution via FTP.
● Pre-emphasis and file distribution control based on XML-RPC.
● User channels with point-to-point Ethernet channel per link.
● Time synchronization via Network Time Protocol (NTP).
● Domain Name Service (DNS).
● Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP).
Fig. 95 hiT7300 DCN services
Management protocols are provided by the hiT7300:
Fig. 96 hiT7300management protocols
The DCN Protocol Stack
of the hiT7300 NE’s
The
The protection
protection switching
switching is
is initiated
initiated
by
by TNMS
TNMS by
by inspecting
inspecting the
the NE
NE
reachability
reachability via
via different
different gateways
gateways
HTTP FTP
SNMPv3
TL1
TNMS C
UDP
TCP/IP Network
TCP
IPv4 (w/o routing )
Eth (MAC)
TNMS CT
At
At least
least two
two GW
GW NE‘s
NE‘s
should
should be
be implemented
implemented
to
to provide
provide redundant
redundant
access
access to
to the
the DCN
DCN
Q
Q interface
interface connects
connects
hiT7300
hiT7300 Network
Network
(static
(static connection)
connection)
to
to TNMS
TNMS
Q interface
(GW function)
Non-GW NE
DCC
DHCP
DHCP provides
provides all
all NE’s
NE’s with
with
internal
internal IP
IP address,
address, NAT-P
NAT-P
then
then maps
maps different
different TCP
TCP
ports
ports to
to the
the different
different NE
NE IP‘s
IP‘s
to
to hide
hide the
the internal
internal DCN
DCN
OSC
( 12.5 Mb/s)
Non-GW NE
Q interface
(GW function)
DCC
DCN
DCN provides
provides interconnected
interconnected
Data
Data Communication
Communication
Channels
(DCC)
Channels (DCC) to
to operate
operate all
all
connected
connected NE's
NE's
Eth (PHY)
10/100 base-T
DCC
The
The QF
QF interface
interface has
has aa prepreconfigured
configured IP
IP address
address (DHCP
(DHCP
// DNS
DNS server)
server) for
for direct
direct local
local
connection
connection to
to the
the @
@ LCT
LCT
(temporary
(temporary GW
GW function)
function)
QF
interface
@-CT
Fig. 97 hiT7300 Data Communication Network
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
103
Hardware & Functionality
The SURPASS hiT7300 DCN network is implemented as a switched network and the
Message Communication Function (MCF) is implemented as a L2 switch.
A network of interconnected NE's is designated a DCN domain. The communication
is established via the OSC of the optical links and an Ethernet/L2 switching network
implemented by the NE's (MCF). A single DCN domain supports up to of 118 NE's.
TIP
To maintain a loop-free topology of a switched DCN network/sub-network, the
SURPASS hiT7300 supports the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP).
The connection to the Local Craft Terminal (LCT) and/or the TNMS-C can be done
via the Ethernet ports (Q interface) on the CCEP/CCMP controller card. The QF
interface has a preconfigured (via DHCP/DNS service) IP address for connecting the
LCT. The Q port is normally reserved for the TNMS. If the Q port is used for DCN
interconnection with another NE a second IP address can be assigned to the QF
port.
104
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

TNMS
TCP/IP Network
Q interface
(GW function)
TNMS CT
MCF
MCF
MCF
DCC
DCC
DCC
Designated DCN domain.
The communication is established
via the OSC (DCC) of the optical links and
an Ethernet/L2 switching network
implemented by the NE's (MCF).
A single DCN domain supports up to of 118 NE's.
DCC
Q interface
(GW function) MCF
MCF
STP
STP is
is
active
active
Q/QF
DCC
DCC
MCF
MCF
MCF
DCC
DCC
MCF
To maintain a loop-free topology
of a switched DCN network/sub-network,
the SURPASS hiT7300 supports
the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)
MCF
L2 Switch
MCF
DCC
DCC
Fig. 98 Data Communication Network
TCP/IP Network
TNMS C
IfIf the
the Q
Q port
port is
is used
used for
for DCN
DCN
interconnection
interconnection with
with
another
NE
a
second
IP
another NE a second IP
address
address can
can be
be assigned
assigned to
to
the
the QF
QF port
port for
for GW
GW function.
function.
QF interface
(GW function)
DCC
DCC
Ethernet cable
Q
interface
Q
interface
Both NE‘s are in the same location
Designated DCN domain
Fig. 99 Usage of the Q port for DCN interconnection
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
105
Hardware & Functionality
2.7.4.2
Multi-Domain DCN
A network of interconnected NE's is designated a DCN domain. The communication
is established via the OSC of the optical links and an Ethernet/L2 switching network
implemented by the NE's (Message Control Function (MCF)).
A single DCN domain supports up to 118 NE's managed via a SNMP TMN system or
up to 50 NE's managed via a TL1 TMN system.
The SURPASS hiT 7300 system supports the partitioning of large DCN networks into
smaller DCN sub-networks limited between them by border-NEs which allow a
separation of L2 switching domains.
Each L2 switching domain has its own gateway NE(s) for communication with the
TMN system via the carrier data network. These multi-domain DCN's are
characterized by:
• Up to 16 DCN sub-networks, with a maximum of 118 NE's (via SNMP) or 50 NE's
(via TL1) per L2 domain can be configured.
• Within an L2 domain the DCN traffic is switched, and at the domain borders all
L2broadcast traffic is terminated.
• Border-NE's can connect up to 3 L2 domains.
• Border-NE's can be configured as gateway NE's to provide all the DCN services
(e.g., NAT-P, FTP). These services may run in multiple instances to support
multiple L2 domains.
• Border-NE's can have distinct NE roles (e.g., primary gateway NE, client DHCP)
for each DCN sub-network.
• In-service upgrade from a single to a multi-domain DCN network is possible.
• Optical enhanced pre-emphasis control is also possible for links where both NE's
belong to different L2 domains.
106
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

Multi-Domain
Multi-Domain DCN
DCN
● Up to 16 DCN sub-networks, with a maximum of 118 NE's (via SNMP) or 50 NE's (via TL1)
per L2 domain can be configured
● Within an L2 domain the DCN traffic is switched, and at the domain borders
all L2 broadcast traffic is terminated
● Border-NE's can connect up to 3 L2 domains
● Border-NE's can be configured as gateway NE's to provide all the DCN services (e.g., NAT-P, FTP).
These services may run in multiple instances to support multiple L2 domains
● Border-NE's can have distinct NE roles (e.g., primary gateway NE, client DHCP)
for each DCN sub-network
● In-service upgrade from a single to a multi-domain DCN network is possible
● Optical enhanced pre-emphasis control is also possible for links where
both NE's belong to different L2 domains
Fig. 100
Carrier Data Network
Q
Q
DHCP_P
L2
Domain1
Q
DHCP_S
Q
DHCP_P
Q
Q
DHCP_P
DHCP_S
DHCP_S
L2
Domain3
L2
Domain2
DHCP_P/S
hiT7300 gateway NE with
DHCP (Primary/Secondary)
server
hiT7300 NE as local (temporary)
gateway for @CT
hiT7300 (domain) border-NE
hiT7300 target NE
Fig. 101
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
107
Hardware & Functionality
2.7.5
Network Time Protocol
The NTP is used for time synchronization of the DCN. When synchronized, all NE's
use the same reference clock for time stamping of log entries, issued events, etc.
The NE's in the DCN rely on the NE's configured as DHCP servers for time
synchronization, i.e., they use the DHCP servers as NTP servers.
The NE's configured as DHCP servers must use external NTP (up to three) servers in
the customer network for time synchronization.
The NE chooses the actual NTP server among the available servers, since NTP
protocol allows redundant time synchronization.
If no NTP server is available (external or DHCP server), the NE goes into a freerunning mode, depending only on its internal clock.
Worker
NTP
Server
Standby
NTP
Server
Customer Network
TNMS
Router
Router
Clock Synchronization direction
OSC
OSC
ONN-T
ONN-T
(GW&DHCP)
(GW&DHCP)
OLR
OLR
OSC
OSC
ONN-I
ONN-I
OLR
OLR
OSC
ONN-S
ONN-S
ONN-T
ONN-T (GW)
(GW)
hiT7300
hiT7300 Network
Network
Fig. 102 Network Time Protocol
TIP
In multi-domain topologies, border-NE's which are configured as DHCP clients,
obtain time synchronization from all DHCP server NE's (i.e., DHCP servers from all
the network domains) by selecting the best reference time.
108
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality
2.7.6

Engineering Order Wire interface
The EOW interface can be used to establish conference and selective calls from one
NE to other NE(s) using a handset.
When plugged, a handset is automatically in the same conference call of all the other
handsets connected to the same line. The communication line is built from all
shelves, belonging to different NE's, which are interconnected by OSC's.
In case of a selective call the operator selects an NE by dialing a 3-digit number,
which is configured via LCT.
EOW calls are carried over OSC and transmitted together with the OSC payload via
the optical fiber along the entire transmission line.
In ring and meshed networks, the line may form a closed ring. A ring manager opens
the loop, to prevent the EOW call from feedback distortion.
Inter-shelf EOW connection in multi-degree ONN's is achieved with a 4-wire cable
that interconnects the controller cards of different shelves belonging to the same NE.
This allows EOW calls in interconnected rings and meshed networks
Handsets
Handsets
Ring
Ring Manager
Manager should
should
be
be enabled
enabled e.g.
e.g. in
in this
this
NE
NE to
to avoid
avoid distortion
distortion
Connections
Connections via
via 4-wire
4-wire
interface
interface between
between the
the
NE’s
NE’s pertaining
pertaining two
two
different
different optical
optical links.
links.
Fig. 103 Engineering Order Wire interface
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
109
Hardware & Functionality
2.7.7
User channels
The SURPASS hiT 7300 user channels (each 10 Mbit/s) are used for bidirectional
connections between NE's via the OSC or GCC0, providing the customer with a
point-to-point Ethernet connection for specific data network or remote access to NE's
not reachable via DCN. The user channels are accessible via two Ethernet ports,
User 1 and User 2.
Up to two user channels (belonging to different spans) can be terminated on each
controller card. If both user channels belong to the same span only one user channel
can be terminated. Transit user channels (i.e., transfer traffic routed to another span)
are forwarded to the respective span by the NE shelf controller.
The actual number of user channels that can be used in an NE depends on the
number of transponders and line amplifier cards configured with OTU-k. Per NE a
maximum of 26 GCC0 channels and 8 OSC channels is supported, each carrying two
user channels.
In ONN's, the user channels are terminated by default. However, they can be set to
through connected via LCT (within the same controller card) or by interconnecting the
User 1/User 2 connectors (of different controller cards) via an Ethernet cable. In
OLR's, the user channels are through connected by default. Using LCT, the through
connection can be opened and the user channels are accessible at OLR's also.
ONN-T
ONN-T
UC2
UC2 port
port
UC2
UC2 port
port
OLR
OLR
OLR
OLR
UC1
UC1 port
port
ONN-I
ONN-I
ONN-T
ONN-T
UC2
UC2 port
port
UC1
UC1 port
port
UC2
UC2 port
port
Patch
Patch
cord
cord
Fig. 104 User channels
110
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality
2.7.8

Telemetry Interface
The TIF sensors (inputs) and TIF actors (outputs) are intended to be used for
traditional user-defined “housekeeping” purposes. The TIF sensors usually supervise
particular events at the site (e.g., fire alarm, over-temperature alarm, door-open
alarm, etc.) and carry alarms issued by external equipment (e.g., StrataLight OTS4000 and MPBC RMH07 series). The TIF actors usually control particular devices at
the site (e.g., lights, air conditioning, etc.).
TIF sensors and actors are available on the first shelf (001) of the CCEP-1 controller
card with 16 sensors and 15 actors. Actors, 1 to 8, are free to be used by the user.
The remaining actors, 9 to 15, are used for equipment/communication alarm
indication purposes, visible and audible. The TIF sensors generate an environmental
alarm on the NE, when the current state differs from the configurable normal state.
TIF actors
Description
TIF Actors, 1 to 8
Free to be used by the user
TIF actor 9
Critical Alarms (audible)
TIF actor 10
Major Alarms (audible)
TIF actor 11
Minor Alarms (audible)
TIF actor 12
Critical Alarms (visible)
TIF actor 13
Major Alarms (visible)
TIF actor 14
Minor Alarms (visible)
TIF actor 15
Power Equipment Alarm
TIF sensors and actors are available on the CCEP-1 controller card with 16 sensors and 15 actors;
TIF sensors supervise events and TIF actors control devices. TIF actors can be used as follow:
Fig. 105 TIF Actors
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
111
Hardware & Functionality
2.7.9
Controller Cards functions
Each shelf is to be equipped with a controller card at a dedicated slot position. There
is always one main shelf which includes the NE controller and there can be several
extension shelves which have a shelf controller. The controller cards act as a NE
controller on the main shelf and the sub-shelves, mainly providing NE central
interfaces and functions.
The Controller cards provide the central monitoring and control functions for the
system, as well as the MCF to operate the Q and QF communication interfaces.
Using these interfaces, the Controller card performs the following main functions:
• Fault Management:
Monitoring all system alarms and forwarding their states to the network
management system.
• Performance Management:
On request, sending all optical performance management information to the
network management system and/or a craft terminal.
• Configuration Management:
Configuring the system to either default settings or to persistently stored settings
initiated by the network management system and/or a craft terminal.
• Security Management:
Controlling the individual access via the network management system and/or a
craft terminal to particular NE functions, using a hierarchical security management
user ID and password concept.
• Equipment Management:
Monitoring the actual and required shelf equipping.
• Communication Management:
Implementing the MCF for the communication between all NE's and the network
management system.
• Software Management:
Performing all software downloads, uploads, and software integrity functions.
• Real Time Management:
Controlling the real-time clock.
• Providing alarm outputs from shelves and racks.
• Controlling the NE alarm LED's (e.g., major/minor, for communication and
equipment alarms).
112
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

Controller card performs the following main functions:
● Fault Management: Monitoring all system alarms and forwarding their states to the network management
system.
● Performance Management: On request, sending all optical performance management information to
the network management system and / or a craft terminal.
● Configuration Management: Configuring the system to either default settings or to persistently stored
settings initiated by the network management system and/or a craft terminal.
● Security Management: Controlling the individual access via the network management system and/or a
craft terminal to particular NE functions, using a hierarchical security management user ID and password
concept.
● Equipment Management: Monitoring the actual and required shelf equipping.
● Software Management: Performing all software downloads, uploads, and software integrity functions.
● Real Time Management: Controlling the real-time clock.
● Providing alarm outputs from shelves and racks.
● Controlling the NE alarm LED's (e.g., major/minor, for communication and equipment alarms).
Fig. 106 Controller cards main functions
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
113
Hardware & Functionality
2.7.10
Controller Cards types
Three types of controller cards are available as described below:
• CCEP-1, NE and main shelf controller card with TIF/Alarm interfaces;
• CCEP-2, NE and main shelf controller card with TIF/Alarm interfaces; necessary
for GMPLS
• CCMP-1, NE and main shelf controller card without TIF/Alarm interfaces;
• CCMP-1, NE and main shelf controller card without TIF/Alarm interfaces;
necessary for GMPLS
• CCSP-1, extension shelf controller card.
The CCEP and CCMP controller cards consist of the same controller card
motherboard, where only the CCEP includes an additional module for TIF/Alarm
interfaces. Both CCEP and CCMP can be equipped in the main shelf for operation as
the NE controller card and providing the external management interfaces (Q, QF) of
the NE.
The CCSP card is equipped in each extension shelf of the hiT7300. The front plate of
the CCSP card looks exactly as the CCMP card except that it has eliminated all the
redundant functions (e.g. Q, QF interface) that are already available in the main
controller card (CCEP/CCMP). This results in reduction of component and power
supply requirement sufficient for management of an extension shelf.
The following table explains the external interfaces provided on the front panel of the
controller cards:
Label on card
Function
Fault
LED (red)
Fault indication of controller
OK
LED (green)
Service status of controller
UBAT 1 to 4
LED (green)
Shelf power supervision
COM-AL (CRIT,
MAJ, MIN)
LED (red, orange, yellow)
Communication alarm status
EQUIP-AL (CRIT,
MAJ, MIN)
LED (red, orange, yellow)
Equipment alarm status
INFO
LED (green / red)
General Purpose Indication
4-pin RJ22 connector
Handset connector
EOW
D-SUB9 connector
EOW shelf interconnection
USER 1 / USER 2
10/100BaseT, RJ45
connector
User channel 1 & 2 (point to point
user channel connection)
ILAN 1 / ILAN 2
10/100BaseT, RJ45
connector
Internal LAN shelf connection 1 &
2 (connection between shelves)
RJ22 ---
114
Physical I/F
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality
30mm

40mm
not on
CCMP/CCSP
Lever
1
2
3
4
TIF IN
SUBD 25
CRIT
MAJ
MIN
CRIT
MAJ
MIN
INFO
CCSP
Fault
OK
ACO
UBAT
COM
- AL
EQUIP
AL
RJ 22
D-SUB 9
TIF OUT
Alarm
EOW
SUBD 25
User2
/
User1
ILAN2
ILAN1
Q
QF
Lever
Fig. 107
Label on card
Physical I/F
Function
Q
10/100BaseT, RJ45
connector
Management Interface (not
usable on CCSP)
QF
10/100BaseT, RJ45
connector
Management Interface (not
usable on CCSP)
ACO
LED (blue)
Alarm Acknowledge Indication
ACO
button
Manual Alarm Acknowledge
TIFIN
16 TIF inputs, D-SUB25
connector
Telemetry Interface Inputs
TIFOUT / Alarm
8 TIF outputs + 6 outputs for
TIF or external alarms + 1
power alarm output, DSUB25 connector
Telemetry Interface Outputs, TIF
or External Station Alarms
(audible/visible), External Power
Alarm
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
115
Hardware & Functionality
Controller Cards
CCMP
CCEP
CCSP
Fig. 108 Controller Cards
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
116
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality
2.7.11

Scalable multi-controller architecture
hiT 7300 introduces a multi-controller architecture where the subagent controllers
completely handle the controlled sub NE which improves performance of processing
power intensive applications (e.g. optical GMPLS), as well as start-up performance. It
ensures scalability of a network element (NE) when upgrading networks or
introducing new functionality.
The multi-controller architecture distributes the total workload among several
subsystem controller cards (CCEP/CCMP). One subsystem controller, known as the
‘master agent’, takes the role of the NE controller, provides management interfaces
to the network and delegates tasks to the other controller cards. The other controller
cards, known as ‘subagents’ - are only internally used in the NE, with each being
responsible for a different set of shelves. The subagents only manage those cards
assigned to the subsystem and perform tasks such as equipment management or
performance monitoring.
Existing NE’s can be migrated from single-controller to multi-controller architectures
and support both options. The new ONN-X96 MD-ROADM requires a multi-controller
architecture, due to its large number of supported channels and degrees.
Scalable multi-controller architecture
Fig. 109
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
117
Hardware & Functionality
2.7.12
Optical Attenuator cards
SURPASS hiT7300 provides the O08VA-1 card as variable optical attenuator card for
8 unidirectional channels. Variable attenuators (VOA's) can be used for dynamic
power adjustment as pre- and/or de-emphasis per optical channel or per subband.
Following table shows the technical parameters of O08VA-1 card.
O08VA-1 Technical Data
118
Attenuation range
0-22 dB
Operating Band
1528-1610 nm
Maximum Insertion loss
1.5 dB
Resolution
0.1 dB per step
Response time
10 ms
Power Handling per VOA channel
< 21 dBm
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality
O08VA-1

IN8
IN7
IN6
IN5
IN4
IN3
IN2
IN1
OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1
Fig. 110 Optical Attenuator card
Fig. 111 HW layout
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
119
Hardware & Functionality
2.7.13
Channel power monitor (MCP4x-x) card
The channel power monitor card MCP4x-x provides an in-service monitoring of the
optical channel power levels. The card contains an Optical Spectrum Analyzer (OSA)
for 40/80 channels, which is periodically connected to 4 optical input ports.
There is three different types of the channel power monitor card are available:
Card name
Supported bit rates
Usage
MCP404-1
2.5 Gbit/s; 10 Gbit/s; 40
Gbit/s
40 channels (within 100 GHz grid)
monitoring
MCP404-2
2.5 Gbit/s; 10 Gbit/s
40 channels (within 100 GHz grid)
monitoring
MCP4-1
2.5 Gbit/s; 10 Gbit/s; 40
Gbit/s
80 channels (within 50 GHz grid)
monitoring
The MCP4x-x card is used for:
• In-service measurement of optical channel power levels of the 40 channels on a
100 GHz grid at the source monitoring output port which is used for all optical
amplifier card types as well as for the OSC termination card (LIFB-1).
• Measurement of an automated enhanced pre-emphasis configuration on an optical
pre-emphasis section (i.e., a link with full channel multiplexing/demultiplexing).
Using MCP4xx-x card at the beginning and end of a link in combination with an
attenuator card, provides a fully automated optical link commissioning and an in
service channel upgrade.
• Measurement of an automatic in-service amplifier tilt control. Using MCP4xx-x card
at the beginning and end of a link, allows tilt correction values to be distributed
over the whole link.
• Automatic performance measurement and supervision of optical carriers with
autonomous start of measurement cycle every 300 seconds.
120
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

There is three different types of the channel power monitor card are available:
The MCP4x-x card is used for:
● In-service measurement of optical channel power levels of all channels
● Measurement of an automated enhanced pre-emphasis configuration
● Measurement of an automatic in-service amplifier tilt control
● Automatic performance measurement and supervision of optical carriers
Fig. 112
MCP4x-x
Optical Coupler
MonP1
Tap 1
Optical Coupler
MonP2
Optical Switch
Tap 2
Optical Coupler
MonP3
Tap 3
Optical Coupler
Optical Spectrum Analyzer
(OSA)
MonP4
Tap 4
Fig. 113 Channel power monitor (MCP4x-x) card
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
121
Hardware & Functionality
2.7.14
Optical Transient Suppression Card (OTSC)
In addition, a new Optical Transient Suppression for C-band card (OTSC-1) is
introduced. It provides Transient Suppression Channels (TSCh), which are
permanently powered to prevent the build up of transients and can instantaneously
replace power of dropped channels if most of the transmission channels are lost. The
OTSC-1 placement is a good choice when the customer has extremely rigid
requirements on transient behavior. If there are no specific requirements, the
transient performance of hiT 7300 without OTSC-1 is sufficient.
The advantage of the OTSC-1 is that it allows the reduction of the planned transient
margin in the link design, thus improving reach and lowering cost of the hardware.
Additionally it can be added to any existing link to improve transient tolerance,
without any other change of hardware required. The card offers the following
functionality:
• 96 channel spectral range, suitable for DCM-free networks with 40G/100G CPQPSK technology
• Transient protection for up to 80 traffic channels within the 96 channel plan
• 6 channels used for transient suppression channels, each with 2 x polarization
multiplexed lasers (these channels are blocked for transmission – in addition,
immediate adjacent channels are blocked as well, to optimize transient protection)
• 2 transient cards needed for each bi-directional Optical Multiplex Section (OMS) of
the network (the transient channels are coupled in before the booster amplifier and
blocked at the end of the OMS by the WSS)
• Enhanced transient performance of up to 10dB drops within 100ms
122
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

Fig. 114 HW layout
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
123
Hardware & Functionality
2.7.15
Flow Sensor Card (CFSU)
The CFSU card serves as a flow sensor unit to supervise the hiT 7300 shelf on
sufficient air flow. The CFSU measures the amount of air flow through the shelf by
also taking the absolute air pressure and the air temperature into consideration.
The CSFU card is an optional card which is useful in particular if a NE is installed
within dusty environments in order to give an early indication on insufficient air flow
due to a clogged dust filter within a hiT 7300 shelf. In order to ensure reliable
measurement of the air flow, the CFSU card must be used in the high flow region of
the fan to ensure maximum airflow conditions, for this purpose the card must always
be plugged within slot #1 (left-most slot of a hiT 7300 shelf) and the right hand
neighbor slot must not be empty.
The CFSU card included the following integrated sensors:
• Air flow sensor;
• Absolute air pressure sensor;
• Temperature sensor.
The CFSU card is optimized for the specific air filter media used in hiT 7300 standard
shelf.
When the air flow is below a specific level this condition is alarmed so that the dust
filter mat within the fan unit (CFS) of the hiT 7300 shelf should be replaced.
Additionally there is a timer so that the filter mat is replaced after 6 up to 18 months
of use anyway. At each cycle of determining the dust contamination of the dust filter
mat all fans within the CFS fan tray are accelerated to top speed for 3 minutes and
released to their normal operating speed afterwards. The time interval between each
measurement cycle is configurable from 1 to 255 hours in steps of 1 hour.
At the front panel of the CFSU card there are 3 LED's for signaling different
conditions and a button for restarting the 12 month timer.
• A red LED signals that a fault has occurred (CFSU card problem);
• A green LED signals faultless operation;
• A yellow LED signals that the dust filter mat has to be replaced;
TIP
The restart button causes a restart of the 12 month timer when pressed for more than
5s.
124
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

Flow Sensor Card (CFSU)
● The CFSU card measures the amount of air flow through the shelf;
● The CSFU card is useful in particular if a NE is installed within dusty environments;
● The CFSU card included the following integrated sensors:
Air flow sensor;
Absolute air pressure sensor;
Temperature sensor.
● The CFSU card has a timer so that the filter mat is replaced
after 6 up to 18 months of use anyway;
● CFSU card can also be used for management of dispersion compensation modules,
which are plugged within external DCM shelves;
Fig. 115
Fig. 116 FSC
In addition to air flow supervision, the CFSU card can also be used for management
of dispersion compensation modules which are plugged within external DCM shelves
and therefore do not have a direct internal management interface to the NE controller
(CCxP) of a NE. For this purpose the CFSU card provides a front panel connector
(SUBD) for an electrical SPI interface which can optionally be connected to an
external DCM shelf for access of up to 4 plugged dispersion compensation modules,
which can then be managed by the NE controller.
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
125
Hardware & Functionality
2.7.16
Dispersion Module Management Card (CDMM)
The CDMM card can optionally be used for management of dispersion compensation
modules which are plugged within external DCM shelves and therefore do not have a
direct internal management interface to the NE controller (CCxP) of a NE. For this
purpose the CDMM card provides a front panel connector (SUBD) for an electrical
SPI interface which can optionally be connected to an external DCM shelf for access
of up to 4 plugged dispersion compensation modules, which can then be managed by
the NE controller.
The CDMM card can be used within any slot of a hiT 7300 standard shelf or a hiT
7300 flatpack shelf. The CDMM card occupies 1 slot (30mm).
Dispersion Module Management Card (CDMM)
● The CDMM card is used for management of dispersion compensation modules,
which are plugged within external DCM shelves, where up to 4 plugged
dispersion compensation modules can be managed by the NE controller .
● CDMM card provides a front panel connector (SUBD) for an electrical SPI interface.
● The CDMM card can be used within any slot of a hiT 7300 standard shelf
or a hiT 7300 flatpack shelf.
● The CDMM card occupies 1 slot.
Fig. 117
Fig. 118 CDMM Card
126
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality
3

SURPASS hiT7300 NE Types
hiT 7300
NE Types
!
Fig. 119 NE Types
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
127
Hardware & Functionality
SURPASS hiT7300 offers three basic Network Element Types which are:
• OLR – Optical Line Repeater;
• ONN – Optical Network Node;
• SON (SONF)– Standalone Optical Node.(Flatpack)
The following table lists all SURPASS hiT7300 available NE's types:
NE
OLR
Subtype
n.a.
ONN ONN-T
(80)
Description
Optical Line Repeater
Used for optical signal amplification with dispersion compensation.
Terminates 2 spans.
Optical termination node for realization of a Terminal 1/2 OADM
with up to 40 (80) channels. Used for amplification, dispersion
compensation, and full add/drop within an optical path.
ONN-I
(80)
Optical interconnection node for realization of a FullAccess OADM
or Flexible OADM with up to 40 (80) channels. Used for
amplification, dispersion compensation, and full add/drop.
ONN-R
(80)
Optical interconnection node for realization of a FullAccess OADM
or Reconfigurable OADM (ROADM) with up to 40 (80) channels.
Used for amplification, dispersion compensation, and partial or full
add/drop.
ONN-R2
Cost optimized ROADM for 2 degree ONN with EOL 40 channel
capacity. Used for amplification, dispersion compensation, and
partial or full add/drop.
ONN-RT Tunable ROADM for 40 (80) channels. It has a limited add drop
(80)
capacity of 8 ch @ EOL 40 or 16 ch @ EOL 80 channels.
ONN-S
Optical interconnection node for realization of Small OADM. Used
for amplification, dispersion compensation, and partial add/drop
within a link.
ONN-X
(80)
Optical interconnection node for realization of a PXC with up to 40
(80) channels. Used for amplification, dispersion compensation,
and partial or full add/drop.
ONNX96
Optical cross connect for 96 channels using DCM free network
technology.
SON SON
SONF
128
Standalone Optical Node used for:
Passive optical multiplexing/demultiplexing optionally combined
with transponder application.
Pure transponder application.
Long single span transmission by inter-working with RMH07, 1RU,
and 2RU series from MPBC.
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

SURPASS hiT7300 Network Element Types
OLR
ONN-T
ONN-X
ONN-R
(Optical
(Optical Network
(Remotely
(Optical Network Node
Node Termination) Line Repeater) Remotely reconfigurable) reconfigurable PXC)
SON
(Standalone
Optical Node)
SON
(Standalone
Optical Node)
ONN-S
(Optical Network
Node Small OADM)
SON
(Standalone
Optical Node)
Depending from the NE type up to 40 shelves with up to 350 active
cards (e.g. transponder, optical amplifier), can be supported
OLR
(Optical
Line Repeater)
ONN-I
(Optical Network
Node Interconnection)
Fig. 120 SURPASS hiT7300 Network Element Types_1
NE
Subtype
Description
OLR
n.a.
Optical Line Repeater
Used for optical signal amplification with dispersion compensation.
Terminates 2 spans.
ONN
ONN-T (80)
Optical termination node for realization of a Terminal 1/2 OADM with up to 40 (80)
channels. Used for amplification, dispersion compensation, and full add/drop within an
optical path.
ONN-I (80)
Optical interconnection node for realization of a FullAccess OADM or Flexible OADM
with up to 40 (80) channels. Used for amplification, dispersion compensation, and full
add/drop.
ONN-R (80)
Optical interconnection node for realization of a FullAccess OADM or Reconfigurable
OADM (ROADM) with up to 40 (80) channels. Used for amplification, dispersion
compensation, and partial or full add/drop.
ONN-R2
Cost optimized ROADM for 2 degree ONN with EOL 40 channel capacity. Used for
amplification, dispersion compensation, and partial or full add/drop.
ONN-RT (80)
Tunable ROADM for 40 (80) channels. It has a limited add drop capacity of 8 ch @ EOL
40 or 16 ch @ EOL 80 channels.
ONN-S
Optical interconnection node for realization of Small OADM. Used for amplification,
dispersion compensation, and partial add/drop within a link.
ONN-X (80 / 96)
Optical interconnection node for realization of a PXC with up to 40 (80) channels. Used
for amplification, dispersion compensation, and partial or full add/drop.
SON
SONF
Standalone Optical Node used for:
Passive optical multiplexing/demultiplexing optionally combined with transponder
application.
Pure transponder application.
Long single span transmission by inter-working with RMH07, 1RU, and 2RU series from
MPBC.
SON
Fig. 121 SURPASS hiT7300 Network Element Types_2
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
129
Hardware & Functionality
3.1
Optical Line Repeater (OLR) Network Element
The OLR is a DWDM NE which supports:
• The following card types:
– Controller cards
– Inline amplifier cards
– External pump cards
– Dispersion compensation module cards
• Raman amplification together with one line amplifier card.
• Two bidirectional OSC terminations within a single shelf.
• Power reduction to class 1M (APSD) for laser safety on line, with and without
Raman amplification.
The OLR is used for amplification, channel power boost, power tilt adjustment, and
dispersion compensation in a single-shelf realization, even when Raman pump cards
are required.
The OLR is used as a repeater for optical DWDM signals in both 40-channel and 80channel DWDM transmission systems. The OLR network element structure consists
per transmission direction of an optical inline amplifier card with optional external
pump card (PL-1), and optional Raman pump card (PRC-1) for maximum span
reach. Dispersion compensation for an optical span is applied at the interstage
access ports of the related inline amplifier, either as Dispersion Compensation
Module (DCM) cards within the shelf, or as separate modules in managed
Unidirectional Dispersion Compensation Module (UDCM) trays, depending on the
specific fiber type and the required compensation value.
130
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

Fig. 122 Block diagram OLR
CCEP
PRC
DxxxxSMF
LALI
PL
LALI
PL
DxxxxSMF
PRC
Fig. 123 Example of OLR NE sub-rack equipping
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
131
Hardware & Functionality
3.2
Optical Network Node (ONN)
The ONN is a multi-degree optical network node which terminates multiple Optical
Multiplex Sections (OMS) by optical multiplexing/demultiplexing of individual optical
channels/wavelengths. The number of OMS links terminated by an ONN determines
the nodal degree of the ONN.
An ONN realizes a comprehensive family of optical DWDM network elements for
implementing fixed Optical Terminal nodes as well as fixed or remotely
reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Multiplexers (OADM or ROADM) and Photonic
Cross-Connects (PXC) for multi-degree nodes switching and aggregating traffic from
multiple directions.
ONN Sub-type
Filter Structure
ONN Sub-type
Flexible Full Access
ONN-T 40
X
Filter Structure
Flexible Full Access
X
ONN-R 40/80
X
X
ONN-X 40/80
X
X
ONN-S
ONN-I 80
X
ONN-R2
X
ONN-RT40
X
ONN-RT80
X
ONN-T 80
ONN-I 40
X
X
In case of flexible filter structure the filter structures for the different EOL channel
counts are flexible with respect to the channel upgrade sequence. The following
Table shows the example of upgrade sequence chart. The actual task of wavelength
planning and card selection is fully automated and performed by TransNet
engineering and planning tool.
Upgrade
Chart
132
EOL Channel Count
12 ch.
20 ch.
32 ch.
40 ch.
Filter Type
Filter Type
Filter Type
Filter Type
1st
F04MDU08
F04MDU08
F04MDUC08
F08SB+F04MDN06
2nd
F04MDU06
F08SB+F04MDN06
F08SB+F04MDN06
F04MDN05
3rd
F04MDU05
F04MDN05
F04MDN05
F16SBR+F04MDN08
4th
F04MDN07
F16SBR+F04MDN07
F04MDN07
5th
F04MDN04
F04MDN09
F04MDN09
6th
F04MDN10
F04MDN10
7th
F16SBB+F04MDN04
F16SBB+F04MDN04
8th
F04MDN03
F04MDN03
9th
F04MDN02
10th
F04MDNC01
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

Optical Network Node (ONN)
Fig. 124 Optical Network Node (ONN)
Upgrade sequence chart (flexible filter structure )
Fig. 125 Upgrade sequence chart
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
133
Hardware & Functionality
3.2.1
Examples of Flexible filter structure
Flexible filter structure for EOL=12
The following figure displays the filter structure for EOL=12 with the upgrade path
from the first channel (group) to the last channel (group). The three 4-channel subbands (Cxx) are located within the flat region of the optical amplifier band. The
upgrade path allows any upgrade order for three 4-channel sub-bands.
ONN-T;
ONN-T; Optical
Optical Terminal
Terminal (12
(12 Channels
Channels End-of-Life
End-of-Life Capacity)
Capacity)
F04MDN-1
(C05, C06, C08)
F04MDU-1
F04MDU -1
(C05, C06, C08)
(C05, C06, C08)
LAxB
booster
DWDM
Line
Cx
Cy
Cz
LAxP
preamp
λi λj λk λl
λi λj λk λl
3rd channel group
λi λj λk λl
2nd channel group
1st channel group
Fig. 126 Example of Flexible filter structure for EOL=12
Flexible filter structure for EOL=20
The following figure displays the basic filter structure for EOL=20 with the upgrade
path from the first channel (group) to the last channel (group). The upgrade path
allows any upgrade order for these sub-bands.
ONN-T;
ONN-T; Optical
Optical Terminal
Terminal (20
(20 Channels
Channels End-of-Life
End-of-Life Capacity)
Capacity)
F04MDN-1
(C04)
C01,C02,C03,C04
F08SB-1
LAxB
F04MDU-1
(C07 or C08)
booster
λi λj λk λl
F04MDN-1
(C08 or C07)
DWDM
Line
LAxP
C07,C08,C09,C10
preamp
λi λj λk λl
λi λj λk λl
F04MDN-1
(C05)
C05
λi λj λk λl
F04MDN-1
(C06)
C06
λi λj λk λl
Fig. 127 Example of Flexible filter structure for EOL=20
134
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

Flexible filter structure for EOL=32
The following figure displays the basic filter structure for EOL=32 with the upgrade
path from the first channel (group) to the last channel (group). The upgrade path
allows any upgrade order for these sub-bands.
F04MDN-1
(C 03)
λi λj λk λl
F16SB-1 (blue)
C01
C02
C03
C04
F04MDN-1
(C 04 )
F08SB-1
λi λj λk λl
C01,C02,C03,C04
ONN-T;
ONN-T; Optical
Optical Terminal
Terminal
(32
(32 Channels
Channels End-of-Life
End-of-Life Capacity)
Capacity)
LAxB
F04MDU-1
(C07or C08 or C09)
booster
F04MDN-1
(C 07or C 08
F16SB-1 (red)
λi λj λk λl
C07
C08
C09
C10
F04MDN-1
(C 08 or C 09
DWDM
Line
LAxP
C07,C08,C09,C10
λi λj λk λl
preamp
λi λj λk λl
F04MDN-1
(C10)
λi λj λk λl
λi λj λk λl
F04MDN-1
(C05)
C05
F04MDN-1
(C06)
λi λj λk λl
C06
Fig. 128 Example of Flexible filter structure for EOL=32
Flexible filter structure for EOL=40
The following figure displays the basic filter structure for EOL=40 with the upgrade
path from the first channel (group) to the last channel (group). The upgrade path
allows any upgrade order for these sub-bands. The F08SB-1 card with the red/blue
band splitter is always required.
λi λj λk λl
λi λj λk λl
λi λj λk λl
λ i λj λk λ l
F04MDN-1
F04MDN-1
F04MDN-1
F04MDN-1
(C04)
F16SB-1 (blue)
F08SB-1
C01
C02
C03
C04
C01,C02,C03,C04
LAxB
booster
λi λj λk λ l
λi λj λk λ l
λi λj λk λl
λ i λ j λk λ l
F04MDN-1
F04MDN-1
F04MDN-1
F04MDN-1
(C10)
DWDM
Line
LAxP
F16SB-1 (red)
preamp
C07
C08
C07,C08,C09,C10
C09
C10
F04MDN-1
(C05)
λi λj λk λ l
C05
ONN-T;
ONN-T; Optical
Optical Terminal
Terminal
(40
(40 Channels
Channels
End-of-Life
End-of-Life Capacity)
Capacity)
F04MDN-1
(C06)
λi λj λk λl
C06
Fig. 129 Example of Flexible filter structure for EOL=40
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
135
Hardware & Functionality
3.2.2
Optical Network Node - Terminal, (ONN-T)
The ONN-T is a DWDM NE which is used in Terminal 1/2 OADM architecture. It
multiplexes and demultiplexes all channels. The basic ONN-T structure consists of
transponder cards, filter cards, and optical line amplifier cards (with optional external
pump card(s) and with optional Raman pump card for maximum span reach).
Dispersion compensation for an optical span is applied at the interstage access ports
of the related amplifier, either as DCM cards within the shelf, or as separate modules
in managed UDCM trays, depending on the specific fiber type and the required
compensation value.
Flexible
Flexible ONN-T
ONN-T Structure
Structure
2.5G
(optional)
(optional)
DCM
Pump
flexible subband
structure
2.5G
bidirectional
cards
Pre-Amplifier
40G
Raman
pump
(optional)
Pump
Transponder/
Muxponder
(optional)
MCP4xx
OSA
Booster
10G
VOA cards,
or fixed atten.
Optical
MUX/DMUX
DCM
(optional)
Optical Amplifier, DCM, optional cards
Fig. 130 Flexible Optical Terminal ONN-T
136
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

FullAccess
FullAccess ONN-T
ONN-T Structure
Structure
(optional)
(optional)
DCM
Pump
2.5G
also possible as single
VMUX card (F40V)
2.5G
F40
unidirectional
cards
F40
40G
Pre-Amplifier
Raman
pump
also possible as single
VMUX card (F40V)
(optional)
Pump
Transponder/
Muxponder
VOA cards,
or fixed atten.
(optional)
MCP4xx
OSA
Booster
10G
DCM
(optional)
Optical
MUX/DMUX
Optical Amplifier, DCM, optional cards
Fig. 131 FullAccess Optical Terminal ONN-T
ONN-T
ONN-T 80
80 Structure
Structure
Optical Amplifier, DCM, optional cards
AWG
structure
combined
VOA+MUX
function on
F40V cards
2.5G
(optional)
DCM
(optional)
Pump
F40(V)/O
2.5G
F40(V)/S
Booster
F40(V)/O
(optional)
MCP4xx
OSA
combined
VOA+MUX
function on
F40V cards
F80MDI
10G
Pre-Amplifier
F40(V)/S
Raman
pump
40G
(optional)
Transponder/
Muxponder
VOA cards or
fixed attenuators
MUX/DMUX
cards
Interleaver
card
Pump
DCM
(optional)
Fig. 132 ONN-T 80 structure
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
137
Hardware & Functionality
3.2.3
Optical Network Node - Interconnect (ONN-I)
The ONN-I is a DWDM NE which is used in Flexible or FullAccess OADM
architecture. It is used for amplification, dispersion compensation, termination of
links, and optical channel termination via transponders. The basic ONN-I structure
consists of transponder cards (if channels termination is required), filter cards, and
optical line amplifier cards (with optional external pump card(s) and with optional
Raman pump card for maximum span reach). Dispersion compensation for an optical
span is applied at the interstage access ports of the related amplifier, either as
Dispersion Compensation Module (DCM) cards within the shelf, or as separate
modules in managed UDCM trays depending on the specific fiber type and the
required compensation value.
ONN-I
ONN-I Flexible
Flexible Structure;
Structure; Nodal
Nodal degree
degree 22
(optional)
Pump
DCM
(optional)
flexible
subband
structure
flexible
subband
structure
(optional)
DCM
(optional)
Pump
pass-through
Pre-Amplifier
Booster
bidirectional
cards
add
bidirectional
cards
drop
Booster
Pre-Amplifier
add
pass-through
Raman
pump
drop
OSA
MCP4xx
(optional)
(optional)
MCP4xx
OSA
Raman
pump
(optional)
Optical
MUX/DMUX
cards
VOA cards or
fixed attenuators
direction 1
2.5G
DCM
(optional)
Optical Amplifier, DCM, optional cards
direction 2
VOA cards or
fixed attenuators
2.5G
Pump
Transponder/
Muxponder
Optical Amplifier, DCM , optional cards
Optical
MUX/DMUX
cards
40G
DCM
(optional)
10G
Pump
(optional)
Fig. 133 Optical Network Node - Interconnect (ONN-I)
138
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

ONN-I
ONN-I FullAccess
FullAccess Structure;
Structure; Nodal
Nodal degree
degree 22
(optional)
Pump
DCM
AWG
structure
(optional)
F40
(optional)
DCM
AW G
structure
also possible as
single VMUX
card F40V
(optional)
Pump
F40
add
F40
F40
unidirecional
cards
OSA
MCP4xx
(optional)
Booster
(optional)
MCP4xx
OSA
Pre-Amplifier
unidirecio nal
cards
Raman
pump
drop
pass-through
Booster
Raman
pump
Pre-Amplifier
Pump
(optional)
DCM
(optional)
Optical
MUX/DMUX
cards
Optical Amplifier, DCM , optional cards
add
also possible as
single VMUX
card F40V
drop
pass-through
(optional)
Optical
MUX/DMUX
cards
VOA cards or
fixed attenuators
direction 1
Pump
DCM
(optional)
Optical Amplifier, DCM, optional cards
direction 2
Transponder/
Muxponder
40G
10G
2.5G
2.5G
VOA cards or
fixed attenuators
Fig. 134 Optical Network Node - Interconnect (ONN-I)
ONN-I
ONN-I FullAccess
FullAccess Structure,
Structure,
80
80 Channels;
Channels; Nodal
Nodal degree
degree 22
AWG
structure
F40/O
pass-through
drop
F40/S
Raman
pump
F40(V)/S
Booster
combined
VOA+MUX
function on
F40V cards
F40(V)/O
(optional
)
Pump
F40/O
(optional)
MCP4xx
OSA
OSA
MCP4xx
(optional)
F80MDI
Pre-Amplifier
(optional
)
DCM
F40(V)/O
add
(optional
)
Optical Amplifier
, DCM, optional cards
AWG
structure
combined
VOA+MUX
function on
F40V cards
F80MDI
Optical Amplifier
, DCM, optional cards
(optional
)
DCM
Pump
Booster
Pre-Amplifier
F40(V)/S
pass-through
F40/S
Raman
pump
(optional
)
Interleaver
card
VOA cards or
fixed attenuators
MUX/DMUX
cards
add
DCM
MUX/DMUX
cards
drop
Pump
direction
1 )
(optional
)
(optional
direction 1
Interleaver
card
Pump
(optional
)
DCM
direction 2
Transponder/
Muxponder
40G
10G
2.5G
2.5G
VOA cards or fixed
attenuators
Fig. 135 Optical Network Node - Interconnect (ONN-I)
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
139
Hardware & Functionality
3.2.4
Optical Network Node - Reconfigurable (ONN-R)
The ONN-R is a DWDM NE which is used in FullAccess OADM, or ROADM
architectures by combining the functions of optical channel
multiplexing/demultiplexing and optical channel (wavelengths) switching to a very
compact solution of a (remotely) reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer with
100% access to all 40 optical channels on a DWDM line interface. The basic ONN-R
structure consists of transponder cards (if channels termination is required), filter
cards (F40MR-1 cards and F40-1 cards if add/drop of a single channel is required),
optical line amplifier cards (with optional external pump card(s) and with optional
Raman pump card for maximum span reach). Dispersion compensation for an optical
span is applied at the interstage access ports of the related amplifier, either as DCM
cards within the shelf, or as separate modules in managed UDCM trays depending
on the specific fiber type and the required compensation value.
ONN-R;
ONN-R; Nodal
Nodal degree
degree 22
local
drop
Optical
MUX/DMUX/ROADM
cards
...
local
add
Pre-Amplifier
Booster
λi
pass-through
traffic
F40(V)
Pump
(optional
)
Optical Amplifier
, DCM, optional cards
Raman
pump
Pre-Amplifier
F40MR
F40MR
DCM
(optional
)
pass-through
traffic
Booster
(optional
)
Optical Amplifier
, DCM, optional cards
(optional
)
Pump
DCM
F40(V)
λi
(optional)
MCP4xx
OSA
Raman
pump
(optional
)
DCM
OSA
MCP4xx
(optional)
(optional
)
Pump
local
add
DCM
(optional
)
...
Pump
(optional
)
local
drop
Direction2
Direction1
Transponder/
Muxponder
40G
10G
2.5G
2.5G
VOA cards or fixed
attenuators
(not in case of40V)
F
Fig. 136
140
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

ONN-R;
ONN-R; Nodal
Nodal degree
degree 33
local
drop
Optical
MUX/DMUX/ROADM
cards
(optional
)
DCM
local
add
Pump
(optional
)
pass-through
traffic
F40MR
F40MR
Booster
Pre-Amplifier
λi
pass-through
traffic
F40(V)
(optional
)
DCM
Raman
pump
Pre-Amplifier
Booster
Raman
pump
DCM
F40(V)
λi
(optional)
MCP4xx
OSA
Optical Amplifier, DCM, optional cards
(optional
)
...
OSA
MCP4xx
(optional)
(optional
)
Pump
Pump
local
add
DCM
(optional)
...
(optional)
Optical Amplifier, DCM, optional cards
local
drop
VOA cards /
fixed atten.
(not in case
of F40V)
...
Direction 3
Raman
pump
DCM
Pre-Amplifier
Pump
F40
Booster
(optional)
DCM
(optional)
Pump
Direction 2
...
F40(V)
(optional)
local
drop
(optional)
Optical Amplifier, DCM, optional cards
local
add
Direction 1
Pump
(optional
)
(optional
)
MCP4xx
OSA
Fig. 137
ONN-R
ONN-R 80;
80; Nodal
Nodal degree
degree 22
F40/S
Pump
F 80DC I
(optional)
Raman
pump
F40/O
(optional)
Direction 1DCM
local add
F40V/S
F40V/O
local drop
Optical Amplifier, DCM, optional cards
(optional)
DCM
(optional)
Pump
pass-through
traffic
Pre-Amplifier
WSS
Booster
F 06MR 80
MCP4xx
OSA
OSA
MCP4xx
Optical MUX /DMUX and
WSS cards
F06MR 80
Booster
WSS
Pre-Amplifier
Raman
pump
F80D CI
pass-through
traffic
(optional)
Pump
(optional)
Transponder/
Muxponder
40G
local drop
10G
2.5G
2.5G
local add
Direction 1
DCM
F40V/O
F40V/S
Optical Amplifier, DCM, optional cards
F40/O
DCM
(optional)
F40/S
Pump
Direction(optional
2 )
Fig. 138
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
141
Hardware & Functionality
3.2.5
Optical Network Node – Small, ONN-S
The ONN-S is a 40-channel DWDM NE in Small OADM architecture. It is used for
amplification and link start-up of add/drop-channels within an optical path. The ONNS is cost-optimized for network applications with only a small number of add/dropchannels at intermediate sites, where up to 8 channels out of two 4-channel subbands can be added/dropped from each of the 2 line directions.
The ONN-S only uses a partial optical multiplexing/demultiplexing scheme for the
channels to be locally accessed, while all other optical channels are automatically
passed-through as express traffic.
Each line interface of the ONN-S structure consists of an optical booster and preamplifier, dispersion compensation cards, and optional external pump card(s) and
Raman pump card for the booster. The ONN-S has a maximum add/drop capacity of
8 channels. Channels that are dropped at an ONN-S are terminated at the client
equipment.
142
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

Optical
Optical Network
Network Node–Small,
Node–Small, ONN-S
ONN-S
(optional )
Pump
(optional )
DCM
(optional)
DCM
(optional)
Pump
Optical MUX /DMUX cards
up to 2x 4 channels add /drop
to/ from direction 2
up to 2 x 4 channels add /drop
to/from direction 1
Booster
Booster
subband x
Raman
pump
subband y
subband y
subband x
Pre -Amplifier
local
add /drop
(optional)
DCM
Raman
pump
Pre -Amplifier
local
add /drop
( optional)
Pump
Pump
(optional)
DCM
(optional)
Optical Amplifier , DCM , optional cards
Optical Amplifier , DCM , optional cards
Direction 2
Transponder
cards
10G
10G
2.5G
2.5G
Optical
Attenuator
cards
Direction 1
Fig. 139 Optical Network Node – Small, ONN-S
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
143
Hardware & Functionality
3.2.6
Optical Network Node - ONN-R2
ONN-R2 is a ROADM with F02MR-1 nodal degree 2.
The ONN-R2 is a 40-channel DWDM NE which is used in a ROADM architecture to
provide optical channel multiplexing/demultiplexing and optical channel
(wavelengths) switching in a very compact solution of a remotely reconfigurable
optical add/drop multiplexer with 100% access to all 40 optical channels on a DWDM
line interface.
When compared with the ONN-R, the ONN-R2 is restricted to nodal degree 2
applications and his basic structure consists of transponder cards (if channels
termination is required), filter cards (two F02MR-1 and four F40(V)-1 or F04MDU-1
cards for local add/drop), optical line amplifier cards (with optional external pump
card(s) (PL-1) and with optional Raman pump card (PRC-1) for maximum span
reach). Dispersion compensation for an optical span is applied at the interstage
access ports of the related amplifier, either as DCM cards within the shelf, or as
separate modules in managed UDCM trays depending on the specific fiber type and
the required compensation value The ONN-R2 is a more cost optimized
alternative to the ONN-R in applications that do not require a higher nodal degree or
low add-loss.
Any OTN using ONN-R2 NEs provides a dynamic wavelength provisioning across the
DWDM network, therefore, allowing a modification of the customer traffic demands
without manual equipment installation at intermediate locations by local field service
personnel (OPEX reduction).
ONN-R2
ONN-R2 Structure
Structure
Fig. 140 ONN-R2 Structure
144
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

Fig. 141Block diagram ONN-R2
Direction 1
Fig. 142Block diagram (Direction 1)
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
145
Hardware & Functionality
3.2.7
Optical Network Node - ONN-RT
Optical Network Node - ONN-RT is an Colorless ROADM w/F09MDRT-1/x nodal
degree 2.
The ONN-RT is a 40-channel DWDM NE which is used in a Metro tunable ROADM
architecture by combining the functions of optical channel multiplexing/demultiplexing
and optical channel (wavelengths) switching into a very compact solution of a
(remotely) reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer with 100% access to all 40
optical channels on a DWDM line interface.
The basic 40-channel ONN-RT structure consists of transponder cards (if channels
termination is required), F09MDRT-1/S filter cards, and optical line amplifier cards
(with optional external pump card(s) (PL-1) and with optional Raman pump card
(PRC-1) for maximum span reach). Dispersion compensation for an optical span is
applied at the interstage access ports of the related amplifier, either as DCM cards
within the shelf, or as separate modules in managed UDCM trays depending on the
specific fiber type and the required compensation value.
146
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

ONN-RT
ONN-RT Structure
Structure
Fig. 143
Fig. 144
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
147
Hardware & Functionality
3.2.8
Optical Network Node - Reconfigurable/Tunable (80
channels) – ONN-RT(80)
The ONN-RT80 is a 80-channel DWDM NE which is used in a Metro tunable ROADM
architecture by combining the functions of optical channel multiplexing/demultiplexing
and optical channel (wavelengths) switching into a very compact solution of a
(remotely) reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer with 100% access to all 40
optical channels on a DWDM line interface.
The basic 80-channel ONN-RT structure consists of transponder cards (if channels
termination is required), filter cards (two F09MDRT-1/S, two F09MDRT-1/O, and two
F80MDI), and optical line amplifier cards (with optional external pump card(s) (PL-1)
and with optional Raman pump card (PRC-1) for maximum span reach). Dispersion
compensation for an optical span is applied at the interstage access ports of the
related amplifier, either as DCM cards within the shelf, or as separate modules in
managed UDCM trays depending on the specific fiber type and the required
compensation value.
As the ONN-RT the ONN-RT80 supports 16 colorless add/drop channels per
direction.
Each add/drop wavelength is tunable and remotely configurable.
Any OTN using ONN-RT80 NEs provides a dynamic wavelength provisioning across
the DWDM network, therefore, allowing a modification of the customer traffic
demands without manual equipment installation at intermediate locations by local
field service personnel (OPEX reduction).
148
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

ONN-RT(80)
ONN-RT(80) Structure
Structure
Fig. 145 ONN-RT(80) Structure
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
149
Hardware & Functionality
3.2.9
Optical Network Node - Cross-Connect (ONN-X)
The ONN-X is an advanced 40-channel DWDM NE which is used in PXC
architecture. The basic 40-channel ONN-R structure consists of transponder cards (if
channels termination is required) and an optical channel switching matrix filter card
(F80MR-1). The F80MR-1 card, in the transmitting direction of the DWDM line,
realizes a reconfigurable optical switch matrix with low insertion loss for each
individual wavelength to select per wavelength between 40 input optical channels
received from any other DWDM line port and 40 multiplexed wavelengths of local
incoming channels. In the receiving direction of the DWDM line, a passive optical
splitter forwards the received line signal to both pass through traffic and drop traffic
output ports. Drop traffic is then demultiplexed into individual channels by a F40(V)-1
filter demultiplexer card. For the counter-directional line traffic, another combination
of F08MR-1 and F40(V)-1 cards perform the analog channel switching and
demultiplexing functions. Pass-through traffic between 2 line directions is forwarded
by direct DWDM interconnections between the corresponding F08MR-1 cards.
In each line section the ONN-X structure also includes optical amplifier cards (with
optional external pump card(s) (PL-1) and with optional Raman pump card (PRC-1)
for maximum span reach). Dispersion compensation for an optical span is applied at
the interstage access ports of the related amplifier, either as DCM cards within the
shelf, or as separate modules in managed UDCM trays depending on the specific
fiber type and the required compensation value.
ONN-X;
ONN-X; Nodal
Nodal degree
degree 22
Optical MUX/DMUX and WSS cards
Optical Amplifiers
, DCM, optional cards
(optional
)
Pump
(optional
)
DCM
local
drop
local
add
...
...
F40
Optical Amplifiers
, DCM, optional cards
(optional
)
Pump
DCM
F40V
(optional
)
Raman
pump
Booster
F08MR
F08MR
1:7
Pre-Amplifier
Raman
pump
Pre-Amplifier
1:7
OSA
MCP4xx
MCP4xx
OSA
pass-through
traffic
WSS
Booster
WSS
pass-through
traffic
(optional
)
F40V
DCM
Pump
(optional
)
F40
...
...
local drop
local add
Pump
(optional
)
Transponder/
Muxponder
40G
10G
2.5G
Direction2
2.5G
Direction1
DCM
(optional
)
Fig. 146
150
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality
3.2.9.1

Optical Network Node - Cross-Connect - PXC up to nodal degree 8
Fig. 147 ONN-X; Nodal up to degree 8
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
151
Hardware & Functionality
3.2.10
Optical Network Node - Cross-Connect 80 channels –
ONN-X80
The ONN-X80 is an advanced 80-channel DWDM NE which is used in a PXC
architecture.
The basic 80-channel ONN-X80 structure consists of transponder cards (if channels
termination is required), F06MR80-1 and F06DR80-1 MEMS-WSS filter cards for
optical channel switching in multiplexing (transmitting) and demultiplexing (receiving)
directions at each line interface, respectively, therefore forming a double-WSS
structure.
The traffic to be locally dropped is divided by the WSS of the corresponding
F06DR80- 1 filter card into 2 groups of 40 channels with 100GHz spacing using
standard frequency grid and offset frequency grid, respectively. Each 40-channel
drop group is amplified by a low-cost LASB-1 amplifier before being demultiplexed
into individual drop-channels by the F40-1 demultiplexer filter card.
The traffic to be locally added to a DWDM line is first multiplexed into 2 groups of 40
channels with 100GHz spacing using standard frequency grid and offset frequency
grid by the respective F40-1 multiplexer filter card. Each 40-channel add group is
then aggregated by the WSS of the corresponding F06MR80-1 card, which also
performs optical channel switching between local add channels and pass-through
channels from any other DWDM line interface(s) of other direction(s).
152
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

ONN-X
ONN-X 80;
80; Nodal
Nodal degree
degree 22
Optical Amplifier, DCM, optional cards
(optional)
DCM
pass-through
traffic
WSS
Raman
pump
F40/O
F40/S
LASB
toMCP4
Pump
LASB
to MCP4
(optional)
Direction 1DCM
(optional)
local add
F40/S
F40/O
local drop
(optional)
Pump
WSS
Pre-Amplifier
F06 DR80
Booster
F06 MR80
MCP4xx
OSA
OSA
MCP4xx
F06MR 80
Booster
F06 DR 80
Pre-Amplifier
pass-through
traffic
LASB
(optional)
F40/S
to MCP4
to MCP4
F40/S
DCM
1
Direction 1
40G
local drop
10G
2.5G
2.5G
local add
(optional)
F40/O
Direction 2
Pump
Transponder/
Muxponder
DCM
(optional)
F40/O
Pump
(optional)
Optical Amplifier, DCM, optional cards
Raman
pump
WSS
LASB
WSS
Fig. 148
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
153
Hardware & Functionality
3.2.11
Optical Network Node - Cross-Connect 96 channels –
ONN-X96
The ONN-X96 is an advanced 96-channel DWDM NE which is used in a PXC
architecture with DCM-free transmission. The basic ONN-X96 structure consists of
transponder cards (if channels termination is required) and F09MDR96-1 bidirectional
tunable WSS filter card for optical channel switching in multiplexing (transmitting) and
demultiplexing (receiving) directions at each line interface, respectively.
The ONN-X96 supports two add/drop structures, directional fixed frequency add/drop
supported by F48MDP-1 cards and colorless and directionless add/drop supported
by F09MDR96-1 cards and O09CC-1 for aggregation. A mixture of both add/drop
structures is supported, see an example in figure.
The ONN-X96 supports up to 8 nodal degrees plus two colorless and directionless
structures. Additional colorless and directionless structures are possible, to a
maximum of 5.
For each additional structures the maximum nodal degree is reduced by one. For
example, with 4 colorless and directionless structures is possible to have up to 6
nodal degrees.
For each line section, the ONN-X96 structure includes optical amplifier cards
optimized for DCM-free networks (LABPC-1, LABBC-1), optional Raman pump card
(PRC-2) for maximum span reach, optional channel power monitor card (MCP4-2) for
monitoring of the optical channel power levels and optional transient suppression for
C-band card (OTSC-1) for transient protection. When OTSC card is used the system
is limited to 80 traffic channels.
Directional fixed frequency
The directional fixed frequency structure is the most simple and cost effective
technology to add/drop channels. Each port of the add/drop structure supports only
one specific wavelength, each add/drop structure supports only one specific fiber
degree and within the fiber degree, only one direction. This is ideally suited for static
and directional traffic patterns.
The traffic to be locally dropped is divided by the F09MDR96-1 filter card into 2
groups of 48 channels with 50GHz spacing using standard frequency grid and offset
frequency grid.
The traffic to be locally added to a DWDM line is first multiplexed into 2 groups of 48
channels with 50 GHz spacing using standard frequency grid and offset frequency
grid by the respective F48MDP-1 multiplexer filter card. Each 48-channel add group
is then aggregated in the F09MDR96-1 card by one of the WSS, which also performs
optical channel switching between local add channels and pass-through channels
from any other DWDM line interface(s) of other direction(s).
Pass-through traffic between any line direction is forwarded by direct DWDM
interconnections between F09MDR96-1 filter cards.
154
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

Colorless and directionless
The colorless and directionless is a flexible technology to add/drop channels. Each
port of the add/drop structure can access any wavelength from any direction of any
degree within a node. It is therefore ideally suited for highly flexible traffic patterns.
The add/drop structure consists of WSS based switches (F09MDR96-1 used with the
double WSS switching matrix resulting in reduced complexity) and splitters/
combiners (O09CC-1).
Logically it is divided into a directionless layer and a colorless layer. The directionless
layer consists of one F09MDR96-1 switch, two LABxC-1 amplifiers and one
splitter/combiner card (O09CC-1). Each port of the F09MDR96-1 can be connected
to any WSS or splitter used in the switching matrix, allowing it to access all degrees.
The colorless layer consists of up to 9 F09MDR96-1 cards, each one connected to
one port of the directionless layer. It is able to drop 9 different channels each, leading
to a maximum of 81 tunable ports which can be freely chosen from the overall 96
available channels. F09MDR96-1 cards can be added in increments when demand
increases without traffic impact. If more than 81 channels need to be dropped
(colorless or two or more identical wavelengths need to be dropped), additional
add/drop structures can be
added.
ONN-X96
Fig. 149
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
155
Hardware & Functionality
3.3
SON – Standalone Optical Node
The SON network element is a derivative of the ONN for use as a stand-alone NE for
the following applications:
3.3.1
Transponder NE
SON NE can be used as Pure Transponder NE as a feeder system for:
• hiT7500 DWDM system;
• any 3rd party DWDM system.
It provides the capability to use any hiT7300 transponder card, as a feeder to the
optical channels of a DWDM system, thereby enabling the benefits of the hiT7300
transponders cards for alternative applications. The SON also supports optical
channel protection. Using the tunable transponder card types of hiT7300 also
compliance to a 50 GHz DWDM grid is achieved.
SON
SON –– Standalone
Standalone Optical
Optical Node
Node
hiT7500 DWDM system
CCEP
I04T2G5
I04T2G5
I04T2G5
I04T2G5
I04T2G5
I04T2G5
I04T2G5
I04T2G5
I01T10G
I01T10G
I01T10G
I01T10G
I01T10G
I01T10G
Pure
PureTransponder
Transponder
NE
as
NE asaafeeder
feeder
system
systemfor:
for:
Any 3rd party DWDM system
Fig. 150 hiT7300 SON as a Pure Transponder NE
156
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality
3.3.2

Pure Passive Terminal or OADM (amplifier-less)
hiT7300 SON NE can be used as a simple low-cost DWDM system with up to 40
optical channels for short reach applications in metropolitan areas. It provides the
capability to use the hiT7300 transponder and optical multiplexer/de-multiplexer
cards without any optical amplifier cards. Also optical network configurations
consisting of a linear chain of passive optical terminals with intermediate passive
OADM can be build by SON NE's.
The multiplexing structure for a passive Terminal/OADM can be realized either by
flexible filter structure depending on the required number of channels, or by the F40-1
filter cards providing access to all 40 channels already for first installation. Any
flexible filter structure is supported which consists of a cascade of F04MDU filters
cards optionally terminated by an F04MDN, which allows incremental upgrading in
steps of 4-channel groups; alternatively the F08SB filter card as red/blue splitter can
be used providing the advantage of lower insertion loss with higher number of
channels.
Fig. 151 Example of Pure Passive Terminal and OADM configuration
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
157
Hardware & Functionality
Simple point-to-point Applications
For simple point-to-point applications, a passive SON/SONF terminal allows the
following distances over a G.652 fiber with the SURPASS hiT 7300 transponder
cards:
•
•
•
•
Up to 60 km for 40 optical 2.5 Gbit/s channels (70 km with an F40(V)-1 filter card).
Up to 100 km for 28 optical 2.5 Gbit/s channels.
Up to 18 km for 12 optical 10 Gbit/s channels.
Up to 25 km for 8 optical 10 Gbit/s channels.
The exact reach depends on the number of multiplexed channels due to optical filters
insertion loss. The reach has to be calculated according to the network application.
SON
SON
(passive Terminal )
(passive Terminal )
2.5G
2.5G
2.5G
2.5G
For simple point-to-point applications, SON NE’s
allows the following distances over a G.652 fiber:
• Up to 60 km for 40 optical 2.5 Gbit/s channels (70
10G
Transponder
cards
Optical
MUX/DMUX
cards
km with an F40(V)-1 filter card).
• Up to 100 km for 28 optical 2.5 Gbit/s channels.
• Up to 18 km for 12 optical 10 Gbit/s channels.
• Up to 25 km for 8 optical 10 Gbit/s channels.
10G
Optical
MUX/DMUX
cards
Transponder
cards
Fig. 152 Simple point-to-point Applications
158
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality
3.3.3

Long single span applications
The long single span transmission can be achieved by:
• Interworking of SON and RMH07/1RU/2RU series equipment from MPBC for fiber
spans using SSMF or PSCF.
• Using the SURPASS hiT 7300 LASBC-1 and LAMPC-1line amplifiers within SON.
Interworking with the MPBC RMH07, 1RU, and 2RU amplification systems provide
full support for submarine applications, with a maximum of 80 optical channels
over the same fiber. Only point-to-point architectures without optical regenerator
sites are supported.
Different configurations with different End of Life (EOL) channel counts are released.
The SON also provides a summary alarm supervision function for the connected
MPBC RMH07, 1RU, and 2RU shelf/shelves via its external TIF contacts, so that in
case of an alarm of the MPBC RMH07, 1RU, and 2RU amplification system the SON
reports a corresponding alarm to the TNMS system indicating the affected services.
TIP
For detailed information about the RMH07, 1RU, and 2RU series, please refer to the
MPBC RMH07, 1RU, and 2RU series customer documentation.
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
159
Hardware & Functionality
Fig. 153 Long single span applications
Fig. 154 Maximum EOL channel count MPBC equipment
160
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality
4

CWDM support
!
hiT 7300
CWDM
Support
Fig. 155 CWDM Support Types
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
161
Hardware & Functionality
The CWDM sub-system allows a very simple and low cost implementation of a
passive (no amplification required) optical multiplexing system which can be used for
data collection and aggregation of multiple client data from different remote locations
within enterprise or small metropolitan networks.
The CWDM sub-system can be applied as a feeder system for a SURPASS hiT7300
NE or can simply be used as a standalone system for interconnection between first
mile access equipment and second mile aggregation switches.
The following table lists all the CWDM frequencies supported by the CWDM subsystem:
Wavelengths (nm) Channel #
Subband
Comments
introduced in R4.3; channel deployed
last due to higher attenuation
1271
17
--
1291
18
--
1311
9
B
1331
10
B
1351
11
B
1371
12
B
1391
13
D
1411
14
D
1431
15
D
1451
16
D
1471
1
E
1491
2
E
1511
3
C
1531
4
C
1551
5
C
1571
6
C
1591
7
E
1611
8
E
introduced in R4.3
introduced in R4.2
The CWDM sub-system main features are:
• Support of 18 wavelengths from CWDM grid (according to ITU-T G.694.2) with
CWDM interfaces (according to ITU-T G.695).
• Support of 40 DWDM wavelengths and 14 CWDM wavelengths on the same fiber
as pure passive system.
• Independent from SURPASS hiT7300 shelf.
162
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

• Mechanical integration either by cascadable CWDM add/drop patch-cord
connectors, or by cascadable CWDM filter modules plugged into 1 HU filter pack
shelves.
• Compatible with ANSI, hiT7300 ETSI and standard ETSI racks.
• Compliant with Telcordia GR-1209 and GR-1221 for central office conditions.
Supported
Supported CWDM
CWDM frequencies
frequencies
Fig. 156 Supported CWDM frequencies
Supported
Supported CWDM
CWDM frequencies
frequencies
Fig. 157 Supported CWDM frequencies
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
163
Hardware & Functionality
4.1
Passive CWDM Filter Pack Solutions
The following pluggable passive CWDM filter modules are available for filter-pack
shelves:
• bidirectional single-channel CWDM add/drop modules FC01MDUP-1/n (n=1..8)
with upgrade port
the mechanical height of this module is 1/2 HU, up to 4 such modules can be
plugged into a filter-pack shelf
• bidirectional 4-channel CWDM add/drop module FC04MDUP-1/E for the edge
CWDM channels (i.e. channels 1,2,7,8) with in-service upgrade port for the center
CWDM channels or in-service future (R4.2) upgrade with DWDM channels
height of this module is 1 HU, up to 2 such modules can be plugged into a filterpack shelf
• bidirectional 4-channel CWDM add/drop module FC04MDP-1/C for the center
CWDM channels (i.e. channels 3,4,5,6)
the mechanical height of this module is 1 HU, up to 2 such modules can be
plugged into a filter-pack shelf
• bidirectional grey-channel (1310nm) band splitter module FC01MDUP-1/0 with
upgrade port
the mechanical height of this module is 1/2 HU
1-ch module structure
FC01MDUP-1/n
FC01 (patch-cord)
Common port
Add/drop port
Express port
Module view
upgradeable
non upgradeable
For internal use
Fig. 158 1ch filter modules
164
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

4-ch module structure
FC04MDUP-1/E
FC04MDP-1/C
Module view:
For internal use
Fig. 159 4ch filter modules
List of supported filters
FC02SBP-1
Birdirectional CWDM subband filter, separator
wavelength 1461nm,
separating ch 1..8 from
9..18
FC04MDUP-1/D
4 channel filter with
upgrade port for
1351/1411/1431/1451nm
FC04MDUP-1/B
4 channel filter with
upgrade port for
1311/1331/1371/1391nm
FC01MDUP-1/17
Single channel filter for
1271nm
FC01MDUP-1/18
Single channel filter for
1291nm
FC01MDUP-1/n (n=1..8)
bidirectional single-channel
CWDM add/drop
FC04MDUP-1/E
bidirectional 4-channel
CWDM add/drop module
for the edge CWDM
channels (i.e. 1,2,7,8)
FC04MDP-1/C
bidirectional 4-channel
CWDM add/drop module
for the center CWDM
channels (i.e. 3,4,5,6
FC01MDUP-1/0
bidirectional grey-channel
(1310nm) band splitter
module
hiT DWDM filters are supported
in cards that reside within the hiT 7300
shelf types and hiT 7300 passive DWDM
and CWDM filter modules are supported
within a separate shelf.
For internal use
Fig. 160 CWDM supported filter modules
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
165
Hardware & Functionality
4.2
CWDM Filter Architecture
For local access to only a small number (1..3) of CWDM channels, a cascade of
single channel filters FC01MDUP-1/n can be used. For access to 4 and up to 8 (9)
CWDM channels (optionally including the grey channel) the 4-channel CWDM
multiplexer cascade can be used leading to most compact realization and minimum
insertion loss. In-service channel upgrades can easily be deployed using the upgrade
ports (UP) of the multiplexer modules for cascading of additional modules.
Similarly, add/drop multiplexing schemes can be realized for a small number of
channels by cascading of single-channel multiplexing modules FC01MDUP-1/n and
using the upgrade port (UP) either for an additional multiplexer stage or for throughpassing of traffic between 2 directions of a CWDM transmission line.
CWDM Filter Architecture for 18 channels
For internal use
Fig. 161 18 channel CWDM filter architecture
166
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

Combination with 14ch CWDM with 40ch DWDM
-DWDM: 100 GHz grid
For internal use
Fig. 162 14 channel CWDM + 40 channel DWDM filter architecture
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
167
Hardware & Functionality
4.3
CWDM Topologies
With CWDM, linear point-to-point, point-to-multipoint (collector) and ring topologies
are supported as shown in the following overview example.
CWDM topologies
CWDM ring
Linear CWDM extension
DSLAM
DSLAM
DSLAMs
FC04MDUP-1/E
4-Channel
bidi CWDM filters
FC01MDUP-1/1
Single Channel
bidi CWDM filter
Channel #1
FC01MDUP-1/2
Single Channel
bidi CWDM filter
Channel #2
FC01MDUP-1/3
Single Channel
bidi CWDM filter
Channel #3
Linear CWDM collector
Ring, linear extension (stub), and linear collector topologies
For internal use
Fig. 163 Supported CWDM topologies
168
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality
5

Hardware design
hiT 7300
Hardware
!
Fig. 164 Hardware
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
169
Hardware & Functionality
5.1
hiT7300 racks
The SURPASS hiT7300 rack is designed to meet the demands for environmental
compatible product design and the customer demands for minimum space
consumption. This requires a mechanical concept with respect to cabling, screening
attenuation and power dissipation.
The rack is operated by an AC/DC station converter and a battery 48/60V
(ETSI/ANSI), positive grounded. Voltage range is between -40.5 V DC to -75 V DC
(nominal voltage -48/-60 V DC).
The racks can be installed individually or in combination. Independent network
elements can also be fitted into a rack. The rack is installed and attached below a
planar cable shelf or to the wall depending on the local circumstances. To allow this,
the rack has a height-adjustable adapter. The lower part of the rack is fixed to the
bottom rails with two pins or alternatively screwed to the floor. Height-adjustable feet
can compensate for unevenness in the floor of up to 25 mm.
The bottom of the rack is open so as to let in fresh air; likewise the top of the rack is
open as an air outlet and cable feed-through.
All electrical lines (connection lines for the telecommunications center, cabling
between the sub racks and the rack terminal panel) as well as the FO lines will be
routed using the upright rails of the rack and are secured with cable ties.
Rack, sub-rack and modules are grounded by multiple mechanical and electrical
connections to the planar shelf (protection earth).
PDP
Cables
LVD
Cables
Power
Distribution Panel
ETSI
Rack
PDP
ANSI
Rack
Low Voltage
Disconnect device
2134 mm
2200 mm
Height-adjustable feet
600 mm
300 mm
660 mm
305 mm
Fig. 165 Design of the SURPASS hiT7300 racks
170
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality
5.1.1

hiT7300 Rack Layout
Each rack contains a power distribution panel (PDP) typically mounted near the top.
The fuse panel contains sufficient number of fuses (or circuit breakers) to protect all
the dual redundant power feeds that are connected to each shelf in the rack. Each
rack may be also equipped with an optional Low Voltage Disconnect device (LVD)
mounted above the PDP. The LVD monitors the DC voltage feeds supplied to the
rack from the battery distribution bay, and will automatically block a power feed
whose voltage drops below the lowest allowed limit. Thus, the LVD prevents low
voltage from reaching the shelves in the rack. When the voltage feed recovers to the
proper operating range, the LVD will automatically unblock it.
Beside the PDP and optionally LVD on top of the rack, up to three single row subracks can be mounted in one rack.
Flexible Mechanical Concept
Shelf type
• 510 (H) x 500 (W) x 280 (D) mm³ (ANSI and ETSI racks)
• 15 universal slots for transponders, filters, amplifiers, dispersion
compensating modules, protection cards, …
• Each shelf may contain any arbitrary mix of cards
– no unused, empty rack space
• Shelf also as 19” variant with 13 universal slots
High scalability
• Every node (terminal, repeater, OADM) can start with a single
shelf
• Up to three shelves per rack including cable management
• Up to 32 10G-channels (transponders and optical cards) in
a single rack
• Network termination unit for OTU1/2, 10GE
Cost optimization for any configuration size
For internal use
Fig. 166 hiT7300 Rack Layout
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
171
Hardware & Functionality
5.2
hiT7300 Sub-racks
5.2.1
Standard shelf
The shelves are available as single row shelf in various versions for different
applications (ETSI standard, ETSI special, ANSI). All types of shelf are realized as
one mechanical concept with plug-in technique and front access of the cards and the
fiber connections.
Each shelf consists of:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Card slots for installing 16 cards (15 standard slots, 1 controller slot).
Fiber guides to avoid accidental crimping or squeezing of the optical fibers.
Fan unit with 4 fan packs to cool the shelf’s electronic equipment.
Air filter to protect the electronics and optics from dust and other contaminants.
Edge protection devices on both sides to avoid fiber bending.
Shelf connector panel with connectors for power supply, grounding and laser
power shutdown network.
• Connector for the grounding of wrist straps.
Shelf View
One universal shelf size;
two size of brackets to adapt
for ETSI and ANSI shelf width
Front access only shelf,
wall mounting possible
15 standard traffic cards
multiplexer, transponder
etc.
Dedicated fiber routing
space for easy card
equipping and fan tray
exchange
One slot for standard hiT
7300 controller
Fan Tray
Extra slack fiber
storage
The 12 HU standard shelf
Fig. 167 hiT7300 Sub-racks
172
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

In order to achieve a minimum rack spacing by allowing the outlets of the optical
cables to be in front of the rack beams, it is recommended to use the available
special ETSI rack for assembling SURPASS hiT7300 shelves.
SURPASS hiT7300 shelves can also be assembled within standard ETSI racks.
However, in case of mounting a hiT7300 shelf into a standard ETSI rack, the usable
cabling space in front of the rack beams is rather small which leads to cabling
limitations for typical ONN applications. Therefore, it is advised to apply standard
ETSI rack assembling only in case of OLR applications.
TIP
SURPASS hiT7300 sub-rack can be equipped with the front cover to protect optical
cabling against damage (optional, not applicable in combination with rack front door).
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
173
Hardware & Functionality
Standard ETSI Shelf
hiT7300 Special ETSI Shelf
Fig. 168 Standard ETSI and Special ETSI shelves
SRS-1 shelf
• ETSI or ANSI shelf
• 16 slots available
• 1x fan unit CFS1 or CFS2
SRS-2 shelf
• ETSI or ANSI shelf
• 16 slots available
• 4x fan unit CFS3 or CFS4
Fig. 169 hiT7300 shelf types
174
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality
5.2.2

Flatpack shelf
The SURPASS hiT 7300 also provides a flatpack shelf for small NE installations that
require only a few cards, (e.g., remote passive network termination using SONF with
one or two transponder cards only).
The flatpack shelf can be mounted into ETSI, ANSI and 19” racks, the material of the
flatpack shelf frame is stainless steel.
TIP
The flatpack shelf solution can only be implemented in SONF NE's.
CPE flatpack
19/21 inch, wall
mounting, desktop
Front access only
Fan Tray
Dedicated fiber routing
avoids trouble with fan
tray exchange
Five standard traffic
cards multiplexer,
transponder etc.
Slot on top alternatively
for 110/220V power
supply (for AC
operation)
Slot for standard hiT
7300 controller;
extension shelf
supported
The flatpack shelf shares cards with the full size shelf in an only
5 HU/225mm high shelf (vs 12 HU/517mm of full size shelf)
Fig. 170
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
175
Hardware & Functionality
5.2.3
19" shelf
The SURPASS hiT 7300 also provides a 19 inch shelf for installations in computer
racks that require a high amount of cards.
The 19" shelf can be mounted into 19” racks, the material of the 19" shelf frame is
stainless steel.
SURPASS hiT7300 19“ shelf
Fig. 171 19" shelf
176
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality
5.2.4

DCM Shelf
The DCM shelf is needed in cases where external dispersion compensation modules
are required for dispersion compensation. The DCM's are inserted in drawers which
can be pulled out of the shelf. The drawers are fixed via telescope rails to the frame
of the DCM shelf. The drawers are provided with locks in order to prevent
unintentional opening. The drawers can be pulled out without using any special tool.
One DCM shelf is capable for plugging of 4 DCMs of height 1HU or 2 DCMs of height
2HU, respectively.
Dispersion Compensation Module Shelf
Fig. 172
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
177
Hardware & Functionality
5.2.5
Shelf fan unit and air filter
The shelf fan unit and air filter are mounted in the middle of the shelf, between the
fiber routing guides and the connector panel.
Fan unit:
Each shelf is equipped with a fan unit that provides cooling airflow for the cards. The
fan unit is held securely in place by hand-operated latches. The operating status of
the four individual fans inside the unit is monitored. Detection of a fault condition will
raise the appropriate system alarm and light the LED on the front of the fan unit.
Air filter:
The fan unit contains a one-piece replaceable air filter element to protect the shelf
from ingesting environmental dust or other airborne contaminants. Air filter
replacement must be treated as a periodic maintenance procedure to ensure that the
fans are able to sustain optimum shelf operating temperature.
WARNING
An excessively dirty air filter will reduce cooling airflow.
WARNING
Always provide adequate air cooling. A populated shelf must not be operated
without the fan unit for more than 10 minutes.
178
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

• One fan drawer per shelf with a slide-in fan unit
• The fan unit is equipped with four fans and an air filter
• Front access: the fan unit can be extracted out of the subrack without using
special tools
• The fans will stop within a few seconds after removing the fan unit from the drawer
• The system will be thermally operational under the following condition: one single
fan within the fan unit fails at the maximum air temperature (55° C)
• A red LED indicates the operating status of the fans
Fig. 173 SURPASS hiT7300 Fan unit
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
179
Hardware & Functionality
5.2.6
Connector Panel
The connector panel (COPA) is placed inside the shielded room at the bottom edge
of the SURPASS hiT7300 sub-rack. The external management and power supply
connectors of the sub-rack are centralized on its connector panel. There is also EMI
filter elements.
The COPA connectors are listed in the following table:
Connector
Name
Connector
Type
Remarks
UBAT 1/3;
UBAT 2/4
3W3 D-Sub
For connection of shelf DC operating voltage
(redundant power feeds from the rack Fuse Panel)
APSD IN;
ASPD OUT
8-pin RJ45
Input and output connectors for the amplifier card
Automatic Power Shutdown (APSD) bus. APSD
signaling is daisy-chained from shelf -to-shelf via cable
using these connectors
GND
M4 threaded
stud
Shelf grounding cable must be attached here
DANGER: ROTATING FANS
FAN ALARM
SIEMENS
UBAT1/3 (301)
SURPASS hiT 7300
APSD IN
(302)
APSD OUT
(303)
UBAT2/4(304)
GND (305)
Fig. 174 Connector panel (COPA)
180
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality
5.2.7

Cable outlet
In order to minimize the rack spacing of the sub-racks, the outlets of the optical
cables is available in front of the rack beams. Each sub-rack has a cable outlet which
is placed below the screened room of the sub-rack. All cables can be bent over
defined radius (radius of bend = 30 mm) in order to avoid any problems with
transmission of the optical signals.
Cable outlet
Fig. 175 Cable outlet
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
181
Hardware & Functionality
5.3
RMH07 series Sub-Rack
The RMH07 sub-rack has been designed to safely and securely fit into ETSI standard
racks (600mm width by 300mm depth). A spacing clearance of 200mm or more must
be left on top the RMH equipment to provide proper heat exhaust. No spacing
clearance is required at the bottom of the equipment.
A maximum of two RMH07 sub-racks can be installed in a 2200mm ETSI rack.
Allocating 0.80 m of vertical rack space to each RMH07, the remaining of the rack
space will be used by the power distribution and management monitoring equipment.
The RMH07 sub-rack has three compartments – the cable shelf, card shelf and fan
shelf.
The fan shelf accommodates up to three Environmental Control Units (ECU). The fan
shelf provides power and monitor signal connections for the ECU's via the backplane.
The card shelf contains the main electronic components of the RMH07. The card
shelf compartment is protected with a removable hinged door. There are 23 slots in
the card shelf section of the RMH07 with a slot spacing of 20 mm (0.79”). Forced air
is circulated from bottom to top via the ventilated card guide. The card shelf provides
power, control and monitor signal connections for the PIU via the backplane.
Encoding keys prohibit the user from inserting a card in the wrong location.
All external electrical and optical connections to and from the RMH07 sub-rack are
made through the cable shelf compartment. Electrical connections are made to/from
the backplane, whereas the optical connections are through the fiber fingers between
the card shelf and the cable shelf compartments.
FAN SHELF
CARD SHELF
CABLE SHELF
Fig. 176 RMH07 series Sub-Rack
182
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

RMH07 typical configurations are shown in the following figure:
Typical Configuration: 24 dBm Booster, 1.5 W Raman
Rx1
Tx1
SI G I N
Clie nt
OUT1
BACK REFL
. OSC IN
MON. OUT
Rx3
Tx3
COM
VOA
IN2
OUT3
IN3
Rx4
Tx4
Rx5
Tx5
Rx6
Tx6
IN1
OUT2
VOA
OSC IN
Tx
Rx7
Tx7
Line
SI G O UT
Rx2
Tx2
EITHER VOAS OR FIXED
ATTENUATORS
Rx
Rx8
Tx8
VOA
P24F
OUT4
IN4
F40-1
I08T10G-1
LHD
VOA
OUT5
IN5
VOA
IN6
OUT6
VOA
*
OSU
Out
In
Out
In
VOA
OUT8
O08VA-1
COM
FIXED ATTENUATORS
Out
Tx
RAMAN
MONITOR
OTDR
(APC)
MON. OUT
RCU
1,5W
Rx
MON. OUT
DXXX
XSMF
P15F
DXXX
XSMF
DXXX
XSMF
P17F
Line
In
IN7
VOA
IN8
OSU
SIG I N
SIGNAL
OUTPUT
OUT7
*
OSC
OUT
Clie nt
SLU
OSC
IN
SI G OUT
SLU
OSC
OUT
S IG OUT
SIG IN
SE ED 2
INPUT
FROM
LINE
OS C OUT
MLU
OS C OUT
SE ED 1
MLU
OSC
IN
max: 5 MLUs
min: 4 MLUs
Rx
Tx
I01T10G-1
LHD
F40-1
FIXED
ATTENUATOR
Fig. 177 RMH07 typical configuration_1
RMH-ASU
unused
20 21 22 23
RMH-OSU/1574
unused
RMH-OSU/1574
14 15 16 17 18 19
unused
10 11 12 13
RMH-ECU
RMH-P24F
9
RMH-P17F
8
RMH-P15F
RMH-MLU-2000
7
unused
6
RMH-SLU-360/1454
5
RMH-SLU-360/1454
4
RMH-MLU-2000
3
RMH-ECU
RMH-MLU-2000
2
RMH-MLU-2000
unused
1
RMH-MLU-2000
RMH-ECU
RMH-RCU-RFL-1500-1426/
1454-S2-C5-I1
RMH-PLF
RMH-PLF
Fig. 178 RMH07 typical configuration_2
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
183
Hardware & Functionality
5.4
5.4.1
Mechanical design of modules
Basic card design
Each card consists of a multi-layer PCB with a surrounding ESD grounding frame
and a face plate. The components are fitted on both sides of the PCB.
The SIPAC connectors at the rear of the card as well as the corresponding SIPAC
connectors on the sub-rack backplane are fitted with mechanical card coding
elements. Each card can only be fully inserted into a sub-rack slot that is suitable for
this card, so that fundamental sub-rack equipping errors (which possibly might cause
damages or extensive malfunctions) are impossible. These mechanical coding
elements also ensure the proper centering and grounding of the card in the sub-rack.
All cards have insertion and removal aids that fit into the holes of the card guides in
the sub-rack. No special tools are necessary for inserting or extracting the cards.
WARNING
Note that installing cards requires slow and careful handling. Never apply
excessive force!
Cards comprise all devices PCB (printed circuit boards) which can be installed by a
simple plug-in procedure. Each card can be fixed with captive screws on the top and
bottom card levers. The grounding pins of the SIPAC connectors are pre-mating, so
that they first of all establish the ground connection, when the card is being inserted
into the sub-rack.
184
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

Printed Circuit
Board (PCB)
Insertion and
removal aid
Mechanical
Coding
Insertion and
removal aid
SIPAC
Connector
Fig. 179 Basic card design
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
185
Hardware & Functionality
5.4.2
Card faceplate LED's
Each "active" card, i.e., those that contain an on-board processor, has a green OK
LED and a red Fault LED on its faceplate that indicates card status. "Passive" cards
(e.g., Filter cards) do not have any LED's.
The following information can be obtained from the "OK" LED and from the "Fault"
LED:
Element
Color
Explanation
OK LED
Green When the OK LED is on, it indicates that the card is powered,
operating fault-free, and is capable of carrying traffic
Fault
LED
Red
When the Fault LED is on, it indicates that the card has detected
an on-board hardware or software failure. When the failure
condition clears, the Fault LED is extinguished. The Fault LED is
powered by a backplane power bus, ensuring that a card can light
its Fault LED even if its own on-board power supply fails
Lever
OK
1
C CSP
Fault
ACO
Upper
Upper insertion
insertion
// extraction
extraction aid
aid
“Fault”
“Fault” LED
LED
and
and “OK”
“OK” LED
LED
2
Fig. 180 Card faceplate LED's
186
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality
5.4.3

Cards and optical connectors labeling
The visible surfaces of the insertion and removal aids are used for card identifying
labels.
The front panel of an optical card is either fitted with optical fiber connectors or with
SFP modules. The available fiber connector variants, depending on the card types,
are listed in TED.
Optical Connectors
Labelling
F4 -Out
F4-In
Card Labelling
F3 -Out
F3-In
F2 -Out
F2-In
F1 -Out
F1-In
Optical Connectors
1C-Out
2C-In
DxOut
MxIn
Fig. 181 Example of the cards and optical connectors labeling
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
187
Hardware & Functionality
5.5
SURPASS hiT7300 optical cabling
SURPASS hiT7300 equipment operates at high laser power levels. Use extreme
caution when connecting or disconnecting fiber, since high optical power levels can
be present at card connectors or fiber ends.
WARNING
Never look directly into the end of a fiber, patchcord, fiber pigtail or card
connector until you are sure that no light is present. Permanent eye damage or
blindness can result if exposed to such optical power levels - even for
extremely short durations.
In order to avoid cable damage when routing the optical connections, the following
fiber guiding parts of the system have to be used:
• Fiber duct: Supports safe fiber routing from rack to rack.
• Edge protection: Avoids bending of optical fiber running from or to the fiber guides
of a shelf (shelf-to-shelf connections).
• Cable slots: After connecting the fibers at the cards they have to be guided
through the cable slots. In combination with adjacent space and the bending radius
(25 mm) given by the guiding plastic parts, this will avoid accidental crimping and
squeezing of the optical fiber.
After connecting the cables at the plug-in modules, they have to be run through the
cable slots. Then the cable has to be bent sideward. In order to avoid cable
squeezing, the cables are bent over plastic parts. Distribute the cables in the cable
ducts symmetrically. Therefore, usage of the left or right side of the bay has to be
checked in any case.
The cables are handled sideward to the cable outlets of the shelf. Over length (slack)
must be stored in the cable compartment.
The minimum bending radius of the optical cables is 25 mm. The cable slots directly
below the plug-in module have to be used.
188
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

Fig. 182 Shelf Cable Duct (example)
Fig. 183 Edge protection (example)
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
189
Hardware & Functionality
Fig. 184 Fiber Tray (example).
190
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality
6

Exercise
Fig. 185
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
191
Hardware & Functionality
Exercise 1
Title:
Hardware and Functionality
Objectives:
Demonstrate that you know the main functions of the hardware
of SURPASS hiT7300
Pre-requisite:
Pre-read chapter "Hardware and Functionality;
Physical access to the equipments.
Task 1
Please form four teams. Ask your instructor for the name of your team (e.g.
student01) and write it down in the field below:
I am working with the team:
student _ _
Fig. 186 Login information
Go to the LAB and dependent on the team number, you are responsible for the
following NE:
Case of LAB1:
192
Group Name
NE Name
Row/Rack
Student01
Dresden
06 / 002
Student02
Hannover
06 / 007
Student03
Berlin
06 / 012
Student04
Jena
06 / 022
Student05
Weimar & Muenster
06 / 017
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

Case of LAB2:
Group Name
NE Name
Row/Rack
Student01
Goslar
07 / 502 & 07 / 507
Student02
Olpe
07 / 507
Student03
Unna
07 / 512
Student04
Rastatt
07 / 517
Student05
Kamenz
07 / 522
Each team shall verify and write down in the table below the name of cards and the
slot number where this card is inserted to for the NE assigned.
NE Name: ________________
Shelf 1
Slot
Shelf 2
Card
Slot
Shelf 3
Card
Slot
001
001
001
002
002
002
003
003
003
004
004
004
005
005
005
006
006
006
007
007
007
008
008
008
009
009
009
010
010
010
011
011
011
012
012
012
013
013
013
014
014
014
015
015
015
016
016
016
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Card
193
Hardware & Functionality
Task 2
Using the information from the previous task (card types available in the NE assigned
to your team), try to find out which hiT7300 NE type it is.
In the table below marked the correct NE type of the NE assigned to your team.
NE Type
Which NE type is assigned to my team?
OLR
ONN-T
ONN-I
ONN-R
ONN-S
ONN-X
SON
TIP
Discuss in class the obtained results.
Task 3
In order to understand the optical signal flow each team shall write down the optical
cable numbers of the NE in the appropriate fields of the cabling plan attached to this
exercise.
194
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

MCP404-2
hiT7300 ONN-I; NE Name: Dresden
SR1; SL1
Row/Rack/Subrack: 06/002/02-04
OSA
Tap2
Tap3
Tap1
Tap4
Last changes: 28.01.2008
MonSo
2dB
LAxPC-1LAMPC
Sl 7 -1
Out
SR 1 Sl 4
Mon
P3
Mon
P4
MonSo
LASBC-1
2dB
In
LAMPC-1
LAxPC-1
Out
LASBC - 1
5dB
VOA
In
SR 1 Sl 7
Out
In
To/From ODF
ODF
To/From
1515
DCM
To ISD
VOA
R-OUT
MxIN
MxIN
1C-OUT
2C-IN
DxOUT
2C-IN
2C-IN
IN
193.7
F4
SR1 Sl 9
Out
F4
C
C06-OUT
C06-IN
1C-OUT
From ISD
D
2C-IN
1C-OUT
R-IN
1C-OUT
DxOUT
In
.
1514
Hannover
Sl 7
SR 1 Sl 11
MonSo
C08-OUT
B
F4
2C-IN
O08VA-1
F3
1C-OUT
C08-IN
SR3 Sl 1
OUT
OUT
F3
F3
F2
A
OUT4
IN4
IN 193.1
OUT3
OUT
F16SB-R
IN
F08-SB1
.
194.0
.
193.2
193.1
OUT
OUT1
F4
VOA
193.7
F3
SR3 Sl 2
IN6
IN 193.8
OUT7
Rx2
OUT6
VOA
VOA
IN7
Tx2
1C-OUT
SR3 Sl 1
IN2
O08VA-1
OUT
2C-IN
IN1
O08VA-1
OUT1
OUT2
SR3 Sl 3
VOA
VOA
O08VA-1
SR3 Sl 1
O08VA-1
IN1
OUT2
Prot
1Out
Line
1Out
I04T2G5
Tx
Client
OUT4
IN3
Rx
Tx
IN4
VOA
194.0
Line
OUT3
Client
VOA
OUT
Rx
O08VA-1
Tx
I01T10G
SR3 Sl 3
SR3 Sl.6
SR1 Sl 12
Prot
1In
Line
1In
Tx
Rx Line
Client
SR3 Sl.4
IN
F1
F04MDN-1
/C06
Line
I04T2G5
F2
SR3 Sl15
VOA
IN2
Tx2
OUT2
IN8
IN4
VOA
VOA
Rx2
Line
Client
VOA
SR3 Sl 2
IN1
SR1 Sl 3
VOA
OUT8
SR3 Sl 2
SR1 Sl 8
O08VA-1
F04MDU-1
/C06
SR1 Sl 5
OUT1
OUT4
O08VA-1
IN2
Tx1
Rx1
Line
I04T2G5
OUT
F04MDU-1
/C08
IN
F04MDN-1
/C08
F1
SR3 Sl.7
SR3 Sl 4
IN
O03CP-1
Client
F1
SR1 Sl 13
SR1 Sl. 6
F1
Tx1
F2
F2
IN
IN3
VOA
I04T2G5
OUT
OUT
VOA
Rx1
Muenster
Direction
MonSo
Out
To/From ODF
ODF
To/From
From ISD
SR1 Sl 2
Line
In
SR3 Sl15
DCM
To ISD
Direction
1516
Out
VOA
VOA
In
5dB
SR 1 Sl 14
Client
1513
Mon Mon
P2
P1
Rx
I01T10G
SR3 Sl 5
Fig. 187 NE Dresden SR1&SR3
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
195
Hardware & Functionality
hiT7300 ONN-I; NE Name: Dresden
Row/Rack/Subrack: 06/002/02-04
MonSo
LAxPC-1LAMPC
Sl 7 -1
Last changes: 28.01.2008
Out
SR 2 Sl 4
1120
VOA
In
Tap4
Tap3
Mon
P4
To/From ODF
ODF
To/From
SR2; SL1
In
SR 2 Sl 7
MCP404-2
Mon
P3
LIFB-1
OSA
MonSo
Out
1119
Tap1
Out
Tap2
Jena
From ISD
SR2 Sl 2
Mon Mon
P1
P2
In
2dB
DCM
To ISD
Direction
MxIN
MxIN
1C-OUT
1C-OUT
DxOUT
DxOUT
2C-IN
2C-IN
F4
193.7 IN F4
OUT
F3
F3
IN
OUT
OUT61
IN6
VOA
VOA
IN5
O08VA-1
SR3 Sl 1
OUT
VOA
OUT7
F04MDU-1
/C06
VOA
O08VA-1
SR3 Sl 1
IN7
OUT
F04MDU-1
/C08
SR2 Sl 5
Rx1
I04T2G5
Line Tx1
193.2 IN F1
SR2 Sl.6
SR2 Sl 9
OUT1
IN8
F1
SR2 Sl 8
I08T10G-1
Rx 1
Tx 1
Rx 2
Tx 2
Rx 3
Tx 3
Rx 4
Tx 4
CLIENT
Rx 5
Tx
Tx 5
LINE
Rx 6
Rx
Tx 6
Rx 7
Tx 7
Rx 8
Tx 8
IN
194.0
Client
OUT5
F2
F2
Fig. 188 NE Dresden SR2
196
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

MCP404-2
hiT7300 ONN-I; NE Name: Hannover
SR1; SL1
Row/Rack/Subrack: 06/007/02-03
OSA
Tap2
Tap3
Tap4
Tap1
Last changes: 28.01.2008
Mon Mon
P4
P3
Mon
P2
Mon
P1
MonSo
1518
1- 7LAMPC
1 LAxPC
Sl
Out
SR 1 Sl 14
Out
MonSo
2dB
2dB
LASBC-1
5dB
SR 1 Sl 4
VOA
VOA
In
To ISD
MonSo
1 LAMPC-1
LAxPC
-
Dresden
SR 1 Sl 11
1517
1 - LASBC
In
From ISD
SR1 Sl.12
2C-IN
C
1C-OUT
R-OUT
MxIN
R-IN
IN3
O08VA-1
SR2 Sl 1
VOA
DxOUT
DxOUT
2C-IN
2C-IN
F4
F4
1C-OUT
OUT
A
F2
F08-SB1
F1
VOA
SR2 Sl 2
O08VA-1
VOA
SR2 Sl 2
O08VA-1
VOA
VOA
Tx1
OUT2
Rx2
OUT8
IN4
Rx1
OUT6
Tx2
OUT3
IN5
I04T2G5
Client
Client
SR2 Sl 13
Line
I04T2G5
SR2 Sl 3
Line
VOA
VOA
IN2
IN8
SR1 Sl 5
IN3
IN6
OUT4
VOA
VOA
SR2 Sl 2
O08VA-1
VOA
SR2 Sl 2
OUT1
O08VA-1
SR2 Sl 1
OUT2
O08VA-1
O08VA-1
SR2 Sl 1
SR2 Sl13
OUT5
IN1
IN1
IN2
I04T2G5
OUT
IN 194.0
OUT
193.7
193.8
VOA
Tx2
IN 194.0
F04MDU-1
/C06
F1
F2
IN
IN
OUT
IN7
Rx2
OUT
F1
193.2
IN
SR1 Sl 06
F3
F4
F04MDN-1
/C06
SR1 Sl 10
I04T2G5
Client
SR2 Sl 3
Tx1
Rx1 Line
SR2 Sl 2
Line
F2
F04MDU-1
/C08
1C-OUT
2C-IN
OUT3
IN4
O08VA-1
193.1
IN
OUT
SR1 Sl 8
SR2 Sl 15
OUT7
193.8
IN
OUT
SR1 Sl 15
F04MDN-1
/C08
F3
F3
F16SB-R
F1
Client
MxIN
1C-OUT
1C-OUT
1C-OUT
B
C08-IN
F2
IN
OUT4
VOA
C06-IN
C08-OUT
2C-IN
2C-IN
C06-OUT
1520
Out
VOA
In
Out
D
Berlin
5dB
SR 1 Sl 7
DCM
In
F4
OUT
Direction
MonSo
VOA
To ISD
F3
From ISD
Out
SR1 Sl.2
In
Out
To/From ODF
ODF
To/From
To/From ODF
ODF
To/From
Direction
193.1
1519
In
DCM
OUT1
Fig. 189 Hannover SR1&2
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
197
Hardware & Functionality
MCP404-2
hiT7300 ONN-I; NE Name: Berlin
SR1; SL1
OSA
Tap1
Last changes: 28.01.2008
MonSo
PRC-1
LAxPC
Sl 7 -1
-1LALPC
Out
Mon Line
To ISD
Direction
Muenster
VOA
Out
To ISD
MonSo
Out
F3
F3
F3
IN F2
F2
F2
F2 IN 193.1
OUT
F1 IN
OUT
F1 IN 193.2
OUT
F3
IN6
OUT8
I04T2G5
Client
I01T10G
SR2 Sl.10
Rx
VOA
IN1
Line
SR2 Sl 6
Rx
IN2
OUT2
IN2
OUT1
OUT5
.
Client
SR2 Sl 4
I04T2G5
Tx
SR2 Sl 1
Tx1 Line
IN5
OUT2
IN4
OUT5
OUT3
Tx2
Rx2
VOA
Rx1
VOA
SR2 Sl 1
O08VA-1
SR2 Sl 2
Tx
Rx
Client
SR2 Sl 5
I01T10G
Line
I04T2G5
Line Client
SR2 Sl 4
Tx
O08VA-1
IN4
OUT3
Prot
1In
IN3
OUT4
VOA
VOA
SR2 Sl 2
O08VA-1
SR2 Sl.3
VOA
OUT7
Line
1In
Prot
1Out
O03CP-1
O08VA-1
VOA
SR2 Sl 1
VOA
VOA
SR2 Sl 2
O08VA-1
VOA
SR2 Sl 2
O08VA-1
Tx
Line
1Out
VOA
O08VA-1
SR1 Sl 9
IN3
IN7
.
F04MDU-1
/C08
VOA
SR1 Sl 10
SR2 Sl 1
SR1 Sl 5
IN8
F04MDU-1
/C06
OUT4
IN5
Tx2
F04MDU-1
/C06
O08VA-1
194.0
IN F1
OUT
194.0
F04MDU-1
/C08
OUT6
193.2 IN F1
SR1 Sl 8
I04T2G5
193.8
OUT
OUT6
SR2 Sl 2
SR2 Sl10
F4
OUT
OUT
O08VA-1
Client Line Rx1
Tx1
DxOUT
2C-IN
2C-IN
2C-IN
F4
SR2 Sl 2
193.1
MxIN
DxOUT
IN F4
OUT
193.7
1604
1C-OUT
1C-OUT
1C-OUT
O08VA-1
IN1
Out
VOA
In
DxOUT
2C-IN
VOA
2dB
MxIN
1C-OUT
F4
Hannover
5dB
SR 1 Sl 14
In
MxIN
MxIN
Direction
LASBC-1
5 dB
DxOUT
1602
MonSo
From ISD
To ISD
IN6
In
From ISD
Out
SR1 Sl12
In
SR 1 Sl 7
VOA
VOA
DCM
LALBC - 1
1601
OUT1
Sl 7
SR 1 Sl 11
From ISD
SR1 Sl 2
In
LAMPC-1
LAxPC
-1
Rx2
To/From ODF
ODF
To/From
DCM
MonSo
Out
Line
Mon PRC
2dB
5dB
VOA
In
Client
1603
2dB
Out
SR1 Sl 4
Tap3
Mon Mon Mon Mon
P1 P2 P4 P3
Rx
In ) SR2 SL14
Tap4
Tap2
To/From ODF
ODF
To/From
Row/Rack/Subrack: 06/012/02-03
Fig. 190 NE Berlin SR1&2
198
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

MCP404-2
hiT7300 ONN-R; NE Name: Jena
SR1; SL15
OSA
Tap3
Tap2
Tap4
Tap1
Row/Rack/Subrack: 06/022/02-03
Last changes: 28.01.2008
Mon Mon Mon Mon
P4 P3 P2
P1
EXP-IN
F40 MR-1
Out
193.2
SR 1 Sl 14
194.0
VOA
VOA
VOA
In
From ISD
SR2 Sl14
SR 1 Sl 9
In
VOA
In
SR2 Sl 1
Out
In
1209
From ISD
Direction
Dresden
MonSo
193.2
Out
In
1210
LIFB-1
SR 1 Sl 7
To ISD
COM
IN2
OUT2
196.0
195.9
Rx1
Line
I04T2G5
Client
SR1 Sl 1
I04T2G5
Line
Client
Tx2
Rx2
SR1 Sl 1 Tx1
OUT1
VOA
O08VA-1
O08VA-1
VOA
SR2 Sl.4
SR2 Sl.4
IN1
195.7
195.8
194.0
193.2
192.1
192.1
193.2
194.0
195.9
195.7
195.8
196.0
To/From ODF
ODF
To/From
F40-1
F40-1
SR1 Sl. 6
SR1 Sl13
COM
To/From ODF
ODF
To/From
DCM
To ISD
VOA
EXP-IN
DCM
Out
F40 MR-1
VOA
VOA
SR 1 Sl 4
194.0
RX-OUT2
RX-IN
SR 1 Sl 11
RX-OUT1
TX-OUT
MonSo
LAxPC
-1LAMPC-1
Sl 7
1211
VOA
VOA
Weimar
LAMPC-1
1 -LAxPC
7Sl
VOA
Direction
MonSo
TX-OUT
LIFB-1
SR 2 Sl 6
RX-OUT1
In
RX-OUT2
1212
RX-IN
MonSo
2dB
Out
2dB
Fig. 191 NE Jena SR1&2
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
199
Hardware & Functionality
MCP404-2
hiT7300 ONN-T; NE Name: Weimar
SR1; SL3
Row/Rack/Subrack: 06/017/03
OSA
Tap3
Tap2
Tap1
Tap4
192.1
Mon Mon Mon Mon
P4 P3 P2 P1
2dB
O08VA-1
SR1 Sl13
OUT1
VOA
193.2
IN1
MonSo
VOA
OUT2
194.0
COM
IN2
LAMPC-1
7Sl
1 -LAxPC
Out
SR 1 Sl 4
O08VA-1
SR1 Sl13
VOA
195.7
To ISD
195.8
DCM
In
SR1 Sl 5
Out
In
1118
From ISD
195.9
O08VA-1
Rx1
196.0
IN4
VOA
OUT4
F40-1
I04T2G5
SR1 Sl 9
SR1 Sl 10
Direction
Jena
Rx1
Tx1
Rx2
Tx2
Rx3
Tx3
Rx4
Tx4
CLIENT
Rx5
Rx
Tx5
LINE
Rx6
Tx
Tx6
Rx7
Tx7
Rx8
Tx8
192.1
O08VA-1
To/From ODF
ODF
To/From
SR1 Sl13
Client Line Tx1
SR1 Sl13
IN3
VOA
OUT3
193.2
MonSo
194.0
Out
COM
.
I08T10G-1
In
SR1 Sl 11
2dB
1117
LIFB-1
SR 1 Sl 7
195.7
195.8
195.9
196.0
F40-1
SR1 Sl 2
Fig. 192 NE Weimar SR1
hiT7300 OLR; NE Name: Muenster
Row/Rack/Subrack: 06/017/02
MonSo
LALIC-1 SR1 Sl 7
Out
VOA
From ISD
To ISD
In
Direction
1
Direction
2
Dresden
Berlin
MonSo
PRC-1
SR1 Sl 14
LALIC-1 SR1 Sl 10
Signal
out
Line
Out
In
Mon RPump
Mon Line
5 dB
To/From ODF
ODF
To/From
To/From ODF
ODF
To/From
DCM
Out SR1 Sl 1 In
VOA
From ISD
To ISD
DCM
In SR1 Sl12 Out
Fig. 193 NE Muenster SR1
200
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

hiT7300 ONN-X;
NE Name: Goslar
MonSo
VOA
Out
2dB
5dB
LAMIC-1
2dB
SR2; SL. 14
In
IO4T2G5-1
Client
Client
Line
TX - OUT
TX - IN4
196.00
Tx1
IO4T2G5-1
SR2; SL. 9
F40-1/S
TX - IN6
TX - IN7
193.20
VOA
Rx2
193.80
VOA
TX - IN3
Tx2
196.00
VOA
TX - IN4
Rx1
COM
Tx1
Line
Rx1
VOA
SR2; SL. 10
Client
TX - IN3
193 .80
192.10
IO4T2G5-1
Line
193.20
COM
Line
SR2; SL. 10
Client
TX - IN 1
TX - IN5
VOA
IO4T2G5-1
SR3; SL. 6
RX - OUT 2
TX TX TX TX -
SR2; SL. 3
RX - IN
VOA
192 .10
192.10
RX - OUT 4
193 .20
F08MR-1; SR1; SL. 8
SR1; SL. 7
Out
In
VOA
To ISD
From ISD
RX -OUT 8
RX -OUT 6
RX - OUT 7
RX - OUT 5
RX - OUT 2
RX - OUT 1
RX - OUT 4
RX - OUT 3
F40-1/S
RX-IN
SR2; SL. 6
LAMPC-1
40 %
5dB
MD
60 %
MonSo
MD
LAMIC-1
196.0 0
Sl 7
SR1; SL. 4
Out
60 %
MonSo
1331
TX- IN 5
SR3; SL. 1
TX- IN 4
F40V-1/S
40 %
RX - OUT2
RX - OUT3
RX - OUT6
RX - OUT7
RX -OUT8
193 .8 0
TX- IN 6
TX- IN 7
TX- IN 8
196.00
IN8
RX - OUT5
VOA
193 .80
VOA
TX- IN 3
VOA
MD
RX - OUT 8
TX- IN 2
193.20
TX- IN 1
COM
RX - OUT 7
VOA
WSS 1X 8
RX - OUT 6
VOA
RX - OUT4
COM
RX - OUT 5
TX-OUT
IN5
IN6
IN7
RX - OUT1
RX - OUT 3
60 %
1121
WSS 1 X8
TX - IN2
F40V-1/S
SR2; SL. 9
RX - OUT 1
MD
10dB
F08MR-1; SR2; SL. 1
TX - IN1
MD
TX - IN8
40 %
Out
To ISD
From
ISD
Rx2
TX - IN2
Rastatt
MonSo
To ISD
Tx2
WSS 1X8
Direction
In
VOA
192.10
F08MR-1; SR3; SL. 8
1111
In
To ISD
DCM
SR2; Sl.7
5dB
VOA
From ISD
Sl 7
SR2; SL. 11
From ISD
Mon Mon Mon Mon
P1 P2
P3
P4
Tap3
LAMPC-1
Out
Tap4
OSA
Tap2
Tap1
In
Tap2
Tap1
SR3; SL. 7
10dB
MCP
LAMIC-1
SR3; SL.3
2dB
Out
1141
OSA
5dB
MonSo
MCP
In
Tap3
Out
Mon
P1
P4
P3
P2
Direction
To ISD
DCM
Sr3 Sl.10
Tap4
From ISD
Olpe
Row/Rack/Subrack: 07/502/02-04
07/507/02
Out
SR3; SL. 4
VOA
SR1; SL. 2
LAMPC-1
LAxPC
In
1131
Last changes: 04.02.2009
MonSo
VOA
From ISD
Out
In
RX-IN
-
TX-OUT
1311
In
To ISD
DCM
Slot 92
Direction
Unna
Fig. 194 Goslar SR1, 2&3
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
201
Hardware & Functionality
hiT7300 ONN-S; NE Name: Olpe
Row/Rack/Subrack: 07/507/02
Last changes: 04.02.2009
MonSo
LAxPC
-1LAMPC
Sl 7 -1
1242
In
1- 7LAMPC
1 -LAxPC
Sl
Out
SR 1 Sl 11
VOA
VOA
To ISD
Direction
MonSo
Out
SR 1 Sl 4
Kamenz
DCM
In
From ISD
From ISD
SR1 Sl 1
DCM
SR1 Sl 12
In
Out
Out
To ISD
1142
Direction
Goslar
MonSo
MonSo
Out
Out
1232
In
In
In
LIFB-1
LIFB-1
1132
SR 1 Sl 14
SR 1 Sl 7
MxIN
1C-OUT
DxOUT
DxOUT
2C-IN
MxIN
1C-OUT
5dB
2C-IN
5dB
F4 IN 193.7
OUT
193.7 IN F4
OUT
.
F3 IN 193.8
OUT
193.8 IN F3
I04T2G5
Client Line
SR1 Sl.10
SR1 Sl 6
O08VA-1
I04T2G5
SR1 Sl.5
IN3
OUT1
IN2
IN4
VOA
VOA
VOA
VOA
OUT3
IN1
OUT2
Rx1
Tx1
Tx1
Line
SR1 Sl 15
Rx1
Client
I04T2G5
Line
SR1 Sl.5
Client
I04T2G5
Line
SR1 Sl.10
Client
F04MDU-1
/C06
OUT7
IN5
Rx2
Tx2
Rx2
F1
VOA
VOA
OUT8
IN6
Tx2
F2
IN7
OUT5
IN8
VOA
VOA
SR1 Sl 3
SR1 Sl 6
F04MDU-1
/C06
O08VA-1
F1
OUT6
OUT4
OUT
F2
Fig. 195 Olpe SR1
202
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

hiT7300 ONN-T; NE Name: Unna
MCP404-2
SR1; Sl 5
Row/Rack/Subrack: 07/512/02
OSA
Last changes: 04.02.2009
Tap3
Tap2
Tap4
Tap1
192.1
Mon Mon Mon Mon
P4 P3 P2 P1
5dB
193.1
193.7
MonSo
194.0
LAMPC-1
1 -LAxPC
7Sl
Out
COM
SR 1 Sl 4
Rx1
Client Line
VOA
Tx1
194.4
I01T10G
To ISD
195.8
SR1 Sl 6
Rx2
In SR1 Sl 92 Out
1342
In
From ISD
195.9
Tx2
Client Line
DCM
196.0
Rx1
Tx1
F40V-1/S
SR1 Sl 8
I04T2G5
Direction
SR1 Sl 12
Goslar
Rx1
Tx1
Rx2
Tx2
Rx3
Tx3
Rx4
Tx4
CLIENT
Rx5
Rx
Tx5
LINE
Rx6
Tx
Tx6
Rx7
Tx7
Rx8
Tx8
192.1
193.1
193.7
MonSo
194.0
Out
COM
.
I08T10G-1
In
SR1 Sl 10
2dB
1322
LIFB-1
SR 1 Sl 7
194.4
195.8
195.9
196.0
F40V-1/S
SR1 Sl 2
Fig. 196 Unna SR1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
203
Hardware & Functionality
MCP404-2
hiT7300 ONN-I; NE Name: Rastatt
SR1; SL2
OSA
Row/Rack/Subrack: 07/517/02-03
Tap2
Tap3
Tap1
Tap4
Last changes: 04.02.2009
MonSo
5dB
LAxPC
-1LAMPC
Sl 7 -1
DCM
In
From ISD
SR1 Sl 5
R-OUT
D
2C-IN
C
1C-OUT
R-OUT
C06-IN
C08-OUT
C08-IN
2C-IN
1C-OUT
C06-OUT
2C-IN
In
SR1 Sl 12
Out
1222
From ISD
D
C06-OUT
F4
C
C06-IN
1C-OUT
In
DCM
2C-IN
1C-OUT
R-IN
R-IN
C08-OUT
B
B
A
A
C08-IN
2C-IN
1C-OUT
F3
OUT
F08-SB1
F08-SB1
SR2 Sl. 1
SR2 Sl. 15
F04MDN-1
/C08
SR1 Sl 9
OUT
F4
2C-IN
1C-OUT
OUT
IN
IN
IN2
F04MDN-1
/C06
IN4
OUT3
Rx2
Client
I04T2G5
SR2 Sl.14
Line
Client
SR2 Sl.2
IN7
OUT1
I04T2G5
VOA
VOA
VOA
VOA
OUT7
IN1
OUT2
IN8
OUT1
Tx2
SR1 Sl 10
SR2 Sl 3
IN2
OUT8
IN3
OUT4
Rx2
O08VA-1
IN1
Line
SR2 Sl.14
194.0
OUT2
Tx2
I04T2G5
SR2 Sl.2
Tx1 Line Client
Rx1
Line Rx1
Tx1
F1
F1
F04MDN-1
/C06
SR1 Sl 3
I04T2G5
193.8
OUT
F2
F2
OUT
IN
F3
1C-OUT
VOA
2C-IN
VOA
F3
SR2 Sl 4
OUT
193.8 IN
193.7
O08VA-1
F4
193.7
194.0
Client
SR1 Sl 15
VOA
VOA
SR1 Sl 1
OUT
SR2 Sl 3
O08VA-1
IN6
OUT
F1 IN 193.2
F16SB-R
F16SB-R
SR1 Sl 8
IN5
OUT3
VOA
VOA
VOA
IN4
OUT6
F04MDN-1
/C08
OUT5
IN3
OUT4
193.2
OUT
F2 IN
O08VA-1
IN F2
193.1
OUT
IN F1
VOA
2C-IN
1C-OUT
SR 1 Sl 11
To ISD
In
Kamenz
Sl7
In
LIFB-1
SR 1 Sl 7
F3
LAMPC-1
-1
LAxPC
Out
VOA
1112
F4
Direction
MonSo
Out
MonSo
Out
SR2 Sl 4
Goslar
1212
Out
VOA
In
To ISD
Direction
5dB
SR 1 Sl 14
VOA
In
MonSo
LASBC-1
Out
SR 1 Sl 4
1122
Mon Mon Mon Mon
P1 P2 P3 P4
Fig. 197 Rastatt SR1&2
204
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware & Functionality

MCP404-2
SR1; SL15
OSA
Tap3
Tap2
Tap4
Tap1
hiT7300 LAB2 ONN-R;
NE Name: Kamenz
Row/Rack/Subrack: 07/522/02-03
Mon Mon Mon Mon
P4 P3 P2 P1
Last changes: 04.02.2009
2dB
194.4
VOA
RX-OUT2
F40 MR-1
SR 2 Sl 14
VOA
VOA
In
SR 1 Sl 4
VOA
To ISD
VOA
DCM
In
SR1 Sl 2
Out
1211
In
From ISD
Direction
Rastatt
194.0
MonSo
1 - LASBC
SR 1 Sl 7
193.7
10dB
Out
1221
VOA
In
EXP-IN
DCM
SR2 Sl11
RX-OUT1
TX-OUT
SR 1 Sl 11
VOA
Out
VOA
RX-IN
LAxPC
-1LAMPC-1
Sl 7
From ISD
VOA
MonSo
In
VOA
Olpe
LAMPC-1
1 LAxPC
7Sl
VOA
Direction
MonSo
TX-OUT
193.7
SR 1 Sl 14
1231
SR 1 Sl 9
RX-OUT2
LIFB-1
F40 MR-1
RX-OUT1
Out
EXP-IN
In
RX-IN
MonSo
Out
1241
To ISD
COM
196.0
195.9
195.7
195.8
194.0
193.7
IN2
IN1
Rx
Rx1
Tx
OUT2
VOA
SR2 Sl.5
O08VA-1
OUT1
SR2 Sl 4 Tx1
I04T2G5
SR2 Sl 2
I08TG10
Line Client
SR2 Sl 4
I04T2G5
Line Client
Client Line
IN3
SR2 Sl.5
VOA
Rx
Rx2
Tx2
I01T10G
OUT3
OUT4
SR2 Sl 10 Tx
VOA
SR2 Sl.5
O08VA-1
O08VA-1
VOA
SR2 Sl.5
O08VA-1
IN4
Client Line
192.1
193.7
194.4
195.9
195.7
195.8
196.0
192.1
SR1 Sl. 6
F40-1/S
F40-1/S
SR1 Sl13
COM
Fig. 198 Kamenz SR1&2
TIP
Discuss in class the obtained results.
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks
205
Hardware & Functionality
FINISH.
I’ve got it !
Fig. 199
206
FT22124EN03GLA0
© 2011 Nokia Siemens Networks